LG | M710DS | Owner's Manual | LG LGM710DS,M710DS دفترچه راهنما

LG LGM710DS,M710DS دفترچه راهنما
‫ﻋﺭﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
ENGLISH
USER GUIDE
LG-M710ds
Copyright ©2017 LG Electronics, Inc. All rights reserved.
www.lg.com
MFL70221001 (1.0)
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻛﺭً ﺍ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﻥ ‪ .LG‬ﻭﻧﺭﺟﻭ ﻣﻧﻙ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻭﺁﻣﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ LG‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻘﺩ ﺻُﻣﻣﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻭﻗﺩ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻟﻣﻥ ﻳﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺻﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺇﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺣﻪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺻﺎﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺧﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺩﻋﻣﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺷﺄﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﺭﺟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪ .LG‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺭﺳﻣﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺿﺭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻧﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﺛﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺭﺗﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎﻙ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻳﺔ ﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ‪ LG‬ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻵﺧﺭ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺧﺻﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ؛ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺭﺟﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺗﻬﺎ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﻧﻙ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﻧﺗﻬﻙ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺻﻔﺗﻙ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻙ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﻓﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺧﻁﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﺟﺎﺗﻙ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻁﻔﻳﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠ ًﻔﺎ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻥ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺗﻪ‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫‪QuickButton‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫‪QuickMemo+‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫‪QSlide‬‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪44‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺫ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺹ‬
‫‪51‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﺯﻋﺎﺝ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫‪86‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪56‬‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫‪86‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫‪98‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ‬
‫‪99‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪ 100‬ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪69‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫‪71‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ‬
‫‪72‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫‪74‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺑﺔ‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪76‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺯﻳﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪76‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪77‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫‪ 108‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻐﺔ ‪LG‬‬
‫‪77‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ ‪FM‬‬
‫‪78‬‬
‫‪LG Health‬‬
‫‪79‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء‬
‫‪81‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﺎﻡ‬
‫‪81‬‬
‫‪LG Backup‬‬
‫‪82‬‬
‫‪RemoteCall Service‬‬
‫‪82‬‬
‫‪Chrome‬‬
‫‪83‬‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ‪Google‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪LG Bridge 108‬‬
‫‪ 109‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫‪111‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺋﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺍﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫‪114‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻗﺔ‬
‫‪115‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﻳﺔ )ﺭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺭّ ﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﺦ(‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻥ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻳّﺩ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻣﺭﺍً ﺧﻁﺭﺍً ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ‪ ،‬ﺗﻡ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‪ .‬ﺗﺟﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﺭّ ﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺩﻯ ﺍﻧﻘﻁﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‪ .‬ﺗﺟﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻼﺕ ﻣﺷﻔﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺗﺻﻠﻳﺢ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻣﻥ ‪ LG‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺣﺗﺟﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻟﺗﺻﻠﻳﺣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭّ ﺽ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩّﺩ )‪.(SAR‬‬
‫ﺻُﻣﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﺭّ ﺽ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻣﻳﺔ ﺗﺗﺿﻣّﻥ ﻫﻭﺍﻣﺵ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺻﻣّﻣﺔ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻛﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﺣﺔ ﺑﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻻﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩّﺩ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ .SAR‬ﻭﺗﺟﺭﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ SAR‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻳﺏ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﺭﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ SAR‬ﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻁﺭﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻥ ‪ ،LG‬ﺇﻻ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﺭّ ﺽ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺩ ‪ SAR‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻭﺻﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻠﺟﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻳﻥ‬
‫‪International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection‬‬
‫)‪ (ICNIRP‬ﻫﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﻁ‪/‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﻭﻫﻭ ﺣﺩ ﻣﻘﺳّﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺟﺭﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﻳﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺿﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺑﻠﻎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻟـ ‪ SAR‬ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ‪ 0.454‬ﻭﺍﻁ‪/‬ﻛﺟﻡ‬
‫)‪ 10‬ﺟﺭﺍﻣﺎﺕ( ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ‪ 1.540‬ﻭﺍﻁ‪/‬ﻛﺟﻡ )‪ 10‬ﺟﺭﺍﻣﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻔﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺈﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ )‪ (RF‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ 5‬ﻣﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﺑﺔ ﺣﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺷﺑﻙ ﻟﻠﺣﺯﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺣﻣﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ 5‬ﻣﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻁﻠّﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻً ﻧﻭﻋ ّﻳﺎ ً ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥّ ﻳُﺻﺑﺢ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺎ ً‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠّﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥّ ﻳﺗ ّﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﺻﻳﺎﻧﺗﻪ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺑﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ‪ .LG‬ﻻ ﻳﻐﻁﻲ ﺿﻣﺎﻥ ‪LG‬‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺿﺭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻁﻝ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻔﻛﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻧﻲ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺅﻫﻝ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻔﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ً ﻟـ ‪ ،LG‬ﻟﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﻭﺍء ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ًﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺟﺩﺩ ًﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻳﺔ ﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺿﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺧﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺭّ ﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻟﻼﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻧﻙ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﺫ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻳﺩﺍﻙ ﺭﻁﺑ َﺗﻳﻥ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺷﺣﻧﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑّﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺿﺭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ ﺇﺫ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺳﺎﺧﻧﺎ ً ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ )ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﺫﻳﺑﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺑﻧﺯﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﻧﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺣﻭﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺛﺎﺙ ﻧﺎﻋﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺟﺏ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ ﺟﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺭّ ﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺋﺗﻣﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺫﺍﻛﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ؛ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻏﺭﺽ ﺣﺎﺩ ﺇﺫ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺭّ ﺽ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺑﺣﺫﺭ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺳﺑﺏ ﻳﺩﻋﻭﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺳﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻣﺳﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻛﺳﻭﺭً ﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺗﺣﻭﻻً ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﻅﺎﻳﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺗﺣﻁﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺷﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻔﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺟﻳﺔ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺳﻭء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻥ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫• ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻳﻭﻟّﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻭﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺑﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﻁﻔﻳﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺑﻠﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻭﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻳﺟﻑّ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻔﻳﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻓﺭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺟﻔﻑ ﺷﻌﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻌﺭّ ﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻁﻠﺏ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻟﻠﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻁﺑﻳﺑﻙ‬
‫ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻭﺻﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻ ّﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﺑﺽ ﺑﺈﺑﻘﺎء ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 15‬ﺳﻡ ﻛﺣﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﺑﺽ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻣﺣﺗﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻧﻭﺭً ﺍ ﺳﺎﻁﻌًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺍﻣﺿًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺳﻣﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ 0‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﻭ ‪ 40‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻣﻛﻥ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﻣﺣﻣﻭﻻً ﺑﺎﻟﻳﺩ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺩﻭﻣﺎ ً ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﺑﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻭ ّﻗﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﺩﻋﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ RF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺗﻳﺭﻳﻭ ﻭﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻛﻳﺱ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻣﻠﻪ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﻣﻭﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺑﻁﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺈﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﻣﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻧﻘﻠﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻌﻘﻭﻻً ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺩﺭﻛﺎ ً‬
‫ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﺣﻳﻁ ﺑﻙ‪ .‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻣﻠﺣﺎ ً ﺧﺻﻭﺻﺎ ً ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻥ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺗﺟ ّﻧﺏ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ ﺑﺳﻣﻌﻙ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻣﻊ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﻣﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﺭّ ﺿﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ ﺑﺳﻣﻌﻙ‪ .‬ﻭﻧﻭﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻻ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺎ ً ﻣﻥ ﺃﺫﻧﻙ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻧﻭﺻﻲ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻣﻌﻘﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﻔﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻳﻥ ﻳﺗﺣﺩﺛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻧﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻣ ﱡﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻟﺱ ﺑﺟﻭﺍﺭﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻧﺻﺕ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﻭﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﺻﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﻛﺳﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺻﻠﺏ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻻﺻﻁﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺩﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﻛﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺳﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺟﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺟﻳﺭ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺗﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻳﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺗ ّﺗﺳﻡ ﺃﺟﻭﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺯﻭّ ﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﻗﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﻭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﻣﻳﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻧﻘﻝ ً‬
‫ﻏﺎﺯﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﺋﻼً ﻗﺎﺑﻼً ﻟﻼﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﺗﻔﺟﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ّ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺯﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺭﺓ ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﺣﻳﺙ‬
‫ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻥ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻁﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺳﺑّﺏ ﺑﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻌﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺗﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻁﺎﺋﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻗِﺑﻝ ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﻭ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺗﺳﺑّﺏ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺗﻧﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺃﺑ ًﺩﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻲ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫• ﻟﺳﺕ ﺑﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻓﺭﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻳﺱ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺄﻧﻪ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﻭﺍﺣﻥ ‪ LG‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﻓﺷﻭﺍﺣﻥ ‪ LG‬ﻣﺻﻣّﻣﺔ ﻹﻁﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﻛﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﺃﺩﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻘﺑﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺑﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻋﺩ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺻﻼﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺭّ ﺽ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻧﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗ ّﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻧﻭﻉ ﺧﺎﻁﺊ‪ .‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻣﺎ ً ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‬
‫ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻥ ﻋﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺣﺗﻛﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺣﺎﺩّﺓ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﻛﺄﻧﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻅﺎﻓﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺣﺭﻳﻘﺎ ً‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻥ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﺎءﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﺔ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳًﺎ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻓﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ LG‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺳﺦ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳًﺎ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻪ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺳﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺫﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻧﺗﻅﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺩﺕ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺳﺎءﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺩﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺳﺭﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻙ ﻟﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ّ‬
‫• ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻣﺣﻭّ ﻝ ﻟﻠﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻭّ ﻝ ﻟﻠﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭّ ﻝ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺑﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫• ﻟﺳﻼﻣﺗﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ِ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺄﺧﺫﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻓﺭﻉ ﻟﻠﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻣﻥ ‪LG Electronics‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ Li-Ion‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻛﻭﻥ ﺧﻁﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺅﻫﻝ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳُﺳﺑﺏ ﺿﺭﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺁﻣﻥ ﻭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻕ‬
‫ﺑﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻳﻠﺔ ‪.IP68‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻧﺗﺟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺛﺑُﺕ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ‬
‫)ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ‪ IP68‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻟﻲ ‪ - IEC 60529‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ]ﺭﻣﺯ ‪[IP‬؛ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‪ 15-35 :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 86-106‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭﺑﺎﺳﻛﺎﻝ‪ 1.5 ،‬ﻣﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺭّ ﺽ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ‪ ،IP68‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺣﺻّﻥ ﺿﺩ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ‪ .LG‬ﺗﺟﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺿﺭﺭ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺳﺑﺎﺏ ﺳﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺑﺗﻐﻳّﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ‪) LDI‬ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻳّﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ‪LDI‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺧﻭّ ﻝ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﻠﻳﺢ‬
‫ﻣﺟﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﻛﻔﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺗﻣﻳﺯ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻛﻳﻣﻳﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﺎﺑﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺦ‪ (.‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻣﺎﻟﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻧﺑﻭﻉ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﺧﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺑﺢ ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﻌﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﻁﺊ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻳﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﻋﻣﻘﻬﺎ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻰ ‪ 1.5‬ﻣﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺑﺢ ﻣﻧﺗﺟﻙ ﻣﺑﻠﻼً‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﻭﻣﻛﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺑﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺩَ ﻳﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺃﺻﺑﺣﺗﺎ ﺭﻁﺑ َﺗﻳﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺭ ّ‬
‫ﺷﻪ ﺑﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ )ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺻﻧﺑﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻭﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺵ ﻣﺛﻼً( ﺃﻭ ﺗﺿﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫ ﺇﻧﻪ ﻟﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻣﻪ ﻟﻳﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﺿﻪ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﻬﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﺳﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺑﺗﺳﺭّ ﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺿﺭﺭ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﻘﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭّ ﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺑﻠّﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﻭﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻟﺗﺟﻔﻳﻔﻪ ﺟﻳ ًﺩﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻭﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻫﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺑﻠّﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺿﺎﺩﺍ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﺑﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪/SIM‬ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺗﺢ ﻋﻠﺑﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪/SIM‬ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻠﻘﻪ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺑﻠﻼً ﺃﻭ ﻣﻐﻣﻭﺭً ﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﻭﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﺑﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪/sim‬ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻁﺎﻁ ]ﺣﺷﻭﺓ[ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﺣﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻁﺎﻁ ]ﺍﻟﺣﺷﻭﺓ[ ﺇﺫ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﺯﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻁﺎﻝ ﻛﻔﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪QuickButton‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪Outdoor Essentials‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.QuickButton‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.QuickButton‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻔﻌﻳﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﻧﺩﺋ ٍﺫ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﺩﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻣﺗﻭﻗ ًﻔﺎ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.QuickButton‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻓﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻔﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ ‪.QuickMemo+‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍء ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﻧﻔﺳﻙ ﺑﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻛﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺇﺻﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺑﺎﺏ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﺭﺭ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻏﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻭﺗﺟﻔﻳﻔﻪ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء‬
‫ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ُﻧﺩﺑﺔ ﺑﺈﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻣﻠﺱ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻏﻣﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺛﻧﻲ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺕ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻐﻁﻲ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﺇﺻﺑﻌًﺎ ﻭﺍﺣ ًﺩﺍ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ؛ ﻓﻔﺣﺹ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺻﺑﻊ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻭﻟﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﺎﻛﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺣﻳﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎ ًﻓﺎ؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺎ ًﻓﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺟﺳﻡ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ ﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻛﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﺷﻁﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺿَ ﻊ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﺗﻣ ّﻛﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻐﻁﻲ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﺭﺭ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﻳًﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺻﻣﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺇﺻﺑﻊ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺇﺻﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ ﻟﻳﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﻳﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺣﺩﺍﻫﺎ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻫﺎ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻫﺎ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ :.‬ﻟﻔﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻔﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺑﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻫﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻩ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻳﻘﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻭﻧﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻛﺱ ﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻘﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻌﺭﺿﻪ ﺃﻳﻘﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻭﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪QuickMemo+‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪QuickMemo+‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻣﺑﺗﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺧﺹ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻔﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻔﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ‬
‫‪.QuickMemo+‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻧﺷﺊ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻟﻡ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﻭ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺗﺿﻣ ًﻧﺎ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪.QuickMemo+‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻔﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫• ﺍﻛﺗﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻔﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻛﻳﻔﻣﺎ ﺗﺷﺎء‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻛﺗﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪ QuickMemo+‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء‪ .‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺗﻁﺑﻳ ًﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.QuickMemo+‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫• ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﺭﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪.QuickMemo+‬‬
‫• ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺍﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺄﺓ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ‪.QuickMemo+‬‬
‫• ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺄﺓ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :Capture+‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺄﺓ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﻼﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺫﻭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺋﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﺋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﺋﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻓﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ QuickMemo+‬ﻟﻠﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻁﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﺅﺧﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﻳﻥ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﺅﺧﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﺅﺧﺭً ﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬
‫‪QSlide‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ QSlide‬ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪.QSlide‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻋﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪ :‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ QSlide‬ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻝء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ‪ .QSlide‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ‪ QSlide‬ﺷﻔﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻥ ﺗﺳﺗﺟﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ‪.QSlide‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ‪.QSlide‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺗﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫• ﺩﺑﻭﺱ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ‬
‫• ﻛﻳﺑﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫• ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫• ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﻳﻭ‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻭﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ‪LG Electronics‬؛ ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺳﺑﺑًﺎ ﺧﻠﻼً‬
‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.LG‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺩﺕ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﻛﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﻳﺕ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺷﺭﺍء ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻣﻼء ‪.LG‬‬
‫• ﻟﺷﺭﺍء ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻣﻼء ‪ LG‬ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺯﻋﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺗﻪ ﻋﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ‪ .LG Electronics‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‬
‫ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪ LED‬ﻟﻺﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫‪QuickButton‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )‪(-/+‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻋﻠﺑﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪/SIM‬ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪microSD‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ‪/‬ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﻳﻭ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ‬
‫‪NFC‬‬
‫ﻣﻛﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪/‬ﻛﻳﺑﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁ‬
‫ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ‪ :‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻭﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻗﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺑﺷﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺎﻭﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﺑﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻐﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻧﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ )‪ (-‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫)‪ (+‬ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪.Capture+‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻳﺯﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ‪/‬ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ ﻟﺗﺳﻬﻳﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻧﻅﺭﺓ‬‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﺩﻣﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺟﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ ‪ NFC‬ﻣﺩﻣﺟً ﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ ﺑﻬﻭﺍﺋﻲ ‪ NFC‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻣًﺎ ﺛﻘﻳﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺟﻠﺱ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﺯﺍﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺑﺗﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳ ُﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻁﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺎ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻁﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﺩﺵ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺑﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻲ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ :‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ :‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺣﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺳﻼﺕ ﻭﺗﺻﻔﺢ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻣﻭ ّﻓﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺑﺩء ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺩﺑﻭﺱ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺣﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SIM‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،SIM‬ﻓ ُﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪ LG‬ﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻔﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺩﺑﻭﺱ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﻠﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﻣﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﻫﺑﻳﺔ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺃﻋِ ﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ Nano SIM‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣﻥ‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ٍ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SIM‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺗﻡ ﺻﻧﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻ ّﻧﻌﺔ ﻭﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﻣﻭ ّﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺕ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻣﺑﻠﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬
‫• ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SIM‬ﻓﺈﻥ ‪ LG‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬
‫• ﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ microSD‬ﺗﺻﻝ ﺳﻌﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 2‬ﺗﻳﺭﺍﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻ ّﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﻧﻭﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ exFAT‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﻔﻭﻕ ‪32‬‬
‫ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺿﺭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺩﺑﻭﺱ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﻠﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﻣﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﻫﺑﻳﺔ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬
‫• ﺇﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻳﻌﻪ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﻘﺻّﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻣﺭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺃﻋِ ﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻹﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻹﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻼﻣﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺩﺑﻭﺱ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺧﺭﺝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪LG .‬‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺳﺎﺋﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺳﻭء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻁﺭﻓﻲ ﻛﻳﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻁﺭﻓﻪ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﻛﻳﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫• ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻳﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻣﺑﻠﻼً ﺃﻭ ﺭﻁﺑًﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺳﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻳﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻳﺑﻝ ﺷﺣﻥ ﻭﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ‪ .LG‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺷﺣﻧﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺷﺣﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﺩﻣﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﺫﺍ ﻳﺣﻭﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺿﺭﻭﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﱠ ﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﻳﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺑﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﺯﻉ ‪ USB‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﻟﺗﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭﺓ؛ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﻔﺷﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺻﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺳﻡ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻳﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺷﻭﺍﺣﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻳﺑﻼﺕ ‪ USB‬ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺷﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ LG‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﺯﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ®‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺻﺭ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﻧﺯﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻳﻣﺎءﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺑﻁﺭﻑ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻌﺩﺓ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﺑﺛﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻳﻣﺎءﺓ ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺈﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻭﺣﺭﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻳﻣﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫ﺿﻡ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻌﻳﻥ ﻭﻓﺭﺩﻫﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺿﻡ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺭﺩﻫﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺭﱢ ﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ؛ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺳﺑﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻣﻐﻧﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺿﻭﺍء ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺭﺋﻳﺔ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻙ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻅﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺫﻱ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻳﻛﻔﻲ ﻟﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺷﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻩ ﺑﻁﺭﻑ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺭﺗﺩﺍء ﻗﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻑ ﻅﻔﺭﻙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﻁﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺑﺗﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻘﻳﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻣﺗﺻﻼً ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺗﺭﺍﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ ﻓﻲ ‪Google‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻘﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺟﻠﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻘﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻻﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﻘﺱ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﻘﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﻳّﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ ﻓﻲ ‪ :Google‬ﺗﻣ ّﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻓﻲ ‪Google‬‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﻁﻭﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻛﺗﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪ :‬ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻔﺿﻳﻼﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻘﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠّﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻳﻘﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺣﺩﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻛﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻘﺭﻭءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺗﺔ‬
‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺗﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ”ﺻﺎﻣﺕ“ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ GPS‬ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌّﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻁﻼﻕ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻔﺗﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺃﻳﻘﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻣﺳﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻼﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ً‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺳﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺳﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺭﺩ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺿ ّﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻼﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣًﺎ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺳﻡ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺑﻪ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﺟﻠ ًﺩﺍ ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﻭﻟﻭﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺗﻁﺑﻳ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻪ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ‪ :‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻓﺭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﺧﻔﺎءﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺗﻐﻠﻕ ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻁﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﻣﻼً ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺿﻐﻁﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺏ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺣﻭﻝ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻔﻌﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ؛‬
‫ﻧﻭﺻﻲ ﺑﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻔﺿﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺑﻼ‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺳﺢ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :Knock Code‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻧﻘﺵ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺵ‪ :‬ﺍﺭﺳﻡ ﻧﻘﺷﺎ ً ﻟﻔﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﻣﺯ ‪ :PIN‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﺃﺑﺟﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‪ :‬ﻟﻔﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺗﺭ ﻗﻔﻝ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺕ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ‪ 5‬ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺁﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪ Knock Code‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺯ ‪ PIN‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻛﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻪ ﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺃﻧﺕ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺳﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻓﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷ ﱠﻔﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺇﺧﺗﺭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :Smart Lock‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻣﻭﺛﻭﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻓﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛ ّﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﻘﺱ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﻘﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻘﻭﺩ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻻﻏﻼﻕ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻌﺩﻫﺎ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻘﻔﻝ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪42‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﺩﻣﻬﺎ ‪ .LG‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻅﻔﺭﻙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ /‬ﺃﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺣﻅﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺿﻭء‬
‫ﺑﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻔﺽ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Knock Code‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ‪ Knock Code‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻔﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ Knock Code‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ /‬ﺃﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ‪Knock Code‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.Knock Code‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺗﺭ ﻗﻔﻝ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﺵ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻙ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ‪ Knock Code‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ‪ Knock Code‬ﺍﻟﻣُﻧﺷﺊ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪43‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪Knock Code‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ Knock Code‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺃﻧﺷﺄﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ‪ Knock Code‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ Knock Code‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻔﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻛﺎﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ‬
‫• ﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﺯ ‪ PIN‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻔﺷﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎ ٍ‬
‫ﻑ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻔﺭﺓ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ُ‬
‫ﺷﻔﺭَ ﺕ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻔﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ‪ .LG‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻔﺭﺓ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺃﻱ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪44‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺫ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )‪ (-‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ‪ Screenshots‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺑﺭ ‪Capture+‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺃﺧﺫ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ )‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Capture+‬ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )‪ (+‬ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺹ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪Smart keyboard‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ Smart keyboard‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺹ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ Smart keyboard‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻧﺹ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ Smart keyboard‬ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻩ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺹ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻟﻠﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ‪.QWERTY‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺍﺡ ﻛﻠﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ‪ Smart keyboard‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻻﻗﺗﺭﺍﺡ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻛﺭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﻁﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻙ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺭﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻧﺻًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﻘﺗﺭﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺫﺍ ﻓﺈﻧﻙ ﻟﺳﺕ ﺑﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺣﺭﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪46‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ‪QWERTY‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ LG‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ‪.QWERTY‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ‪.QWERTY‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺣً ﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ‪ QWERTY‬ﻭ ‪ QWERTZ‬ﻭ‬
‫‪.AZERTY‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻋﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺩﻳﻙ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ LG‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ LG‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪48‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺯﺃﻳﻥ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺣﺩﻫﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ‪LG‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻟﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﺩﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻓﺻﻝ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺿﻡ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺭﺩﻫﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ LG‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺑﺟﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﻭﺿﻭﺡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻋﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻣﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ LG‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺻﻕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﺹ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺳﺦ ﻧﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﻠﺻﻘﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﻟﺻﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺻﻘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻗﺹ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺻﻭﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﻟﺻﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻟﻘﺻﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﺻﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪Clip Tray‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺹ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺹ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑـ ‪ Clip Tray‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﺻﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ‪.CLIP TRAY‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ ﻣﻥ ‪ Clip Tray‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﻠﺻﻘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ‪ 20‬ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ ﻛﺣﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺑـ ‪.Clip Tray‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻋﺷﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻛﺣﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﻻً‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺑـ ‪.Clip Tray‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻋﻡ ‪ clip tray‬ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺇﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،Chromecast‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.Google Play‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪51‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ NAS‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ DLNA‬ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ )‪ (DLNA‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ DLNA‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻟﻭ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ LG‬ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻭﺣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ ,‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻠﻑ ‪SmartShare Beam‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﺯﻋﺎﺝ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺗﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻹﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﺗﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺻﻣﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻡ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﺯﻋﺎﺝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻧﺯﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ SmartWorld‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ ‪ Play‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻟﺩﻯ‬
‫ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﺗﺎﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺧﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻌﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻋﻡ ‪ SmartWorld‬ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻌﺩ ﺑﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺈﻳﻣﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺑﻪ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑـ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺿﻭﻥ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳ ًﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻪ ﺛﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻫﺎ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪ :‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺻﻔﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ EasyHome‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻭﺑﺻﻔﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫‪56‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﻭﺇﺟﺭﺍء‬
‫ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻙ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ”‪ “+‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺩﻭﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ‪ 0‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻣﺎء ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﻳﻭ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﻧﻬﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﺽ ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺭﻓﺽ ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫• ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﻓﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﺽ‬
‫ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )‪ (+‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﻔﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )‪ (-‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﻛﺗﻡ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻐﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻧﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺎﺗﺗﻙ ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‪ :‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻁﻠﺏ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﻠﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻛﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻛﺗﻡ ﺻﻭﺗﻙ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺳﻣﻌﻪ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :Bluetooth‬ﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺗﻡ ﺇﻗﺭﺍﻧﻪ ﻭﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻗﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺑﺩء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺟﻣﺎﻋﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻁﺎﻟﺑﺗﻙ ﺑﺩﻓﻊ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺷﺭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺳﺟﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﺋ ٍﺫ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺳﺟﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺳﺟﻼﺕ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﺳﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺣﺫﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺳﺟﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺷﺭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻙ ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺗﻔﺿﻳﻼﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪59‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻟﻠﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺷﺭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻠﻣًﺎ ﻭﺃﻧﺷﺊ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﺎﺩﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺭ ّﺗﺑﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﺳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ ﺗﻔﺿﻳﻼﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻹﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻟﺣﻅﺎﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺛﻣﻳﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻛﻥ ﺣﺭﻳﺻًﺎ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺗﻠﻁﻳﺦ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ ،%5‬ﻓﺎﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻔﻳﺔ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﻲء ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )‪ (-‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫)‪ (+‬ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )‪ (-‬ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﻲء ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫• ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ ﺗﻔﺿﻳﻼﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫• ﺗﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ( ﻭﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻗﻳﻣًﺎ ﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﻭﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻗﻳﻣًﺎ ﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﻭﺩﻗﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺄﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ )‪ (HDR‬ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫ﻻﻗﻁ ﺍﻹﺑﺗﺳﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺿﺑﺎﺑﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪.GPS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻪ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ‬
‫ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻌﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﺳﻳﻁ‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻟﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻳﻣﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻳﺩ‪ :‬ﻟﻼﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻳﻣﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎً‪ :‬ﻟﻼﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻬًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻌﻛﻭﺱ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪63‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻧﻭﺭﺍﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻭﺭﺍﻣﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻁء ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫• ﺣﺭﱢ ﻙ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻧﻭﺭﺍﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻼﺣﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﺧﺫ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﺧﺫ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﻳﻥ )‪ (30‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫‪64‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﺳﻳﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﺳﻳﻁ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪AE/AF lock‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻫﺞ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺑﻳﺋﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫‪65‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺭﺩ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ‪ -/+‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺟﻬﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻳﻣﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻳﻣﺎءﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﻛﻑ ﻳﺩﻙ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺇﻁﺑﺎﻕ ﻗﺑﺿﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻗﺑﺽ ﻳﺩﻳﻙ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻓﺗﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺛﻼﺙ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫• ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻳﻣﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺭﺍﺣﺔ ﻳﺩﻙ ﻭﻗﺑﺿﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻌﻲ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻓﻬﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫‪66‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ً‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺭﻳﺣﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﻙ ﻭﺗﻠﺗﻘﻁ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ً ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ”ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺳﻠﺳﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺳﻠﺳﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﻛﻑ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻳﺩﻙ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺇﻁﺑﺎﻕ ﻗﺑﺿﺗﻙ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺎﺻﻝ ﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﻼﺙ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫‪67‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻳﻣﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺟﻬﻙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻳﻣﺎءﺓ ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻳﻣﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻘﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻛﺱ‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫‪68‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻠ ًﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻝء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻟﻠﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻟﻠﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺗﺢ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻠﺣﺟﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ‪ .‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫‪69‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺛﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺣﻔﻅ ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﺭﺓ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﻧﺳﺧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪QSlide.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﺟﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺣﺫﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺫﻭﻓﺔ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﻼﺕ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ 7‬ﺃﻳﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫‪70‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪LG‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺛﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺟﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪71‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻠﺣﺟﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﻣﺎﻟﻛﻭ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻟﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ‬
‫ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻠﺯﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻧﻲ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻧﺳﺦ ﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ‪ .Hi-Fi‬ﻭﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻭﺕ ‪ Hi-Fi‬ﺭﻣﺯ ‪.Hi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺧﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻌﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺷﺭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﺭﻳﺩﻙ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻙ‬
‫• ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺑﺭﻳﺩﻙ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪72‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺢ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺁﺧﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺁﺧﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺣﺳﺎﺑًﺎ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﺭﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺗﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺣﺩﺍﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺧﺎ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﺙ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺣﻔﻅ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺧﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺩﺍﺙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﻣﻧﺑﺛﻘﺔ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻣﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺩﺍﺙ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ً‬
‫ﺣﺩﺛﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺑﺛﻘﺔ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺍﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ ،Google‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ‪ Google‬ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‬
‫‪ Google‬ﻛﻲ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﺩﻯ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺍﺙ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﺣﺩﺍﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺗﺢ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺳﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺣﺩﺙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﺙ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻳﺱ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻭﻋﺩ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺍﺙ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫‪74‬‬
‫ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻭﻋﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺑﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺣﻔﻅ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺩﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬًﺎ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻣﺩﻥ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺩﻳﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺑﺩء‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺑﺩء ﻟﺑﺩء ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻼﺕ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺯﻳﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺯﻳﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Cloud‬ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺏ ﻓﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫‪76‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﻔﻅ ﺻﻭﺗﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻵﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﻣﻬﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺃﺿﻔﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻣﺳﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ ‪.FM‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ ‪.FM‬‬
‫• ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ؛ ﻭﻋﻧﺩﺋ ٍﺫ ﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻣﺛﺎﺑﺔ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻋﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫‪77‬‬
‫‪LG Health‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪LG Health‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺻﺣﺗﻙ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻌﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻳﺩﺓ ﻟﻣﻣﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺿﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪LG Health‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ‪ LG Health‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪LG‬‬
‫‪.LG Health‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪LG Health‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺧﺹ ‪ LG Health‬ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪LG‬‬
‫‪.LG Health‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫‪78‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺩء ﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﺎﺭﺳﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺗﻣﺭﻳﻧﺎﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻣﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺷﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ LG Health‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻘﺩﻣﻬﺎ ‪ LG Health‬ﺑﺷﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺔ ﺇﻧﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺳُﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺃﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﻁﺑﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﻭﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻼﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺻﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ‪ LG Health‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﺑﻠﺩ ﻭﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬
‫‪ LG Health‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ LG Health‬ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﺑﻠﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺯﻯ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪LG‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻣﺎء‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻣﺎء ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺣﻔﻅ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﻣﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﻼﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫‪79‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻣﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﺳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﻣﺎء‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻥ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﺳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺣﻔﻅ ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻣًﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺣﺫﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﻣﺎء ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﺳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪80‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﺳﻣًﺎ ﺟﺩﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻟﻠﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻋﺿﺎء ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﻣﺎء‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺣﻔﻅ ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪LG‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻬﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺣﻔﻅ‪.‬‬
‫‪LG Backup‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳًﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.LG Backup‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ‪.LG Backup‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺦ ﺇﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ‪ LG Backup‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫‪81‬‬
‫• ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،Google‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Google‬ﻭﺍﺳﻣﺎء ‪ Google‬ﻭﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‬
‫‪ Google‬ﻭﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ‪ Google‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ‬
‫‪ Play‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ Drive‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ‪ *.lbf‬ﺿﻣﻥ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ‪ LG Backup‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺻﻭﺩ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪RemoteCall Service‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻟﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻣﻼء ‪ LG‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻌﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺧﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻌﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.RemoteCall Service‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﺭﺍﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻣﻼء ‪.LG‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺅﻟﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺳﺗﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻭﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻋﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Chrome‬‬
‫ﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Chrome‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﻭﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻌﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫‪82‬‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ‪Google‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Google‬ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ .Google‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﺋ ٍﺫ ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ Google‬ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻛﻥ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،Google‬ﻓﺄﻧﺷﺊ ﺣﺳﺎﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺄﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺁﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Drive‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﺗﺣﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺳﻭﺍء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺩﻭﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Gmail‬‬
‫ﺳﺟﻝ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺑﺭﻳﺩﻙ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Google‬ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Google‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ Google‬ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻁﻘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺷﺎﺭﻛﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪Play‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Google‬ﻻﺳﺗﺋﺟﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺷﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫‪83‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ‪Play‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ ‪ .Play‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺄﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺭ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺁﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻣﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺄﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺁﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪YouTube‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪YouTube‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﺣﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫‪84‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻔﺿﻳﻼﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﻔﺗﺭﺽ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺃﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ‪ :SIM 1‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻭﺃﻳﻘﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM 1‬‬
‫• ‪ :SIM 2‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻭﺃﻳﻘﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM 2‬‬
‫• ﺳﻣﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ :SIM‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪.SIM‬‬
‫• ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻠﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﻹﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ‪ SIM‬ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫‪ SIM‬ﻫﺫﻩ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ‪ SIM‬ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻧﺷﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ”ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻭﺍﻝ‪ :‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻭﺍﻝ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪86‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫• ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫• ﻭﻳﺗﺧﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺑﻕ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺈﺣﺩﻯ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻟﻣﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻧﺳﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺍﻝ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻳﺗﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪87‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi Direct‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ‪ Wi-Fi Direct‬ﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪.Wi-Fi Direct‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.Wi-Fi Direct‬‬
‫• ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ‪ Wi-Fi Direct‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ُﺗﺳﺗﻧﺯﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.Wi-Fi Direct‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪88‬‬
‫‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻟﺗﺑﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ؛ ﻓﻬﺫﺍ ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻗﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫• ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺑﺣﺙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳّﻧﺔ ﻛﻣﺭﺋﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺑﻕ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻠ ًﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻣﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻟﻠﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻗﺑﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪89‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻙ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺍﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺣﺩ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ﻟﺣﻅﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺑﻠﻭﻍ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻛﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪90‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫‪NFC‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﺋﺗﻣﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫‪.NFC‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ‪ NFC‬ﻟﻠﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ ‪ NFC‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ ‪.NFC‬‬
‫‪Android Beam‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﺗﺢ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫‪.Android Beam‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ ‪ NFC‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪91‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﻫﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻟﻭﺣﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ‬
‫‪.LG‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﻳﻬﺎ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ‪ :LG X venture‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻠﻑ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :SmartShare Beam‬ﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﺑﺭ‬
‫‪.SmartShare Beam‬‬
‫• ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ‪.DLNA‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ‪ :‬ﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :LG X venture‬ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺗﻬﺎ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺗﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳُﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳُﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪92‬‬
‫‪LG AirDrive‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ LG‬ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫‪.LG AirDrive‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ LG‬ﻓﺭﺩﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ LG Bridge‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭ‬
‫‪ LG AirDrive‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ LG Bridge‬ﻣﻥ ‪.www.lg.com‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺑﺣﺙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻠ ًﻔﺎ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫• ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،Google‬ﻓﺎﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪93‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ USB‬ﻭﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻛﻳﺑﻝ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫• ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺧﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻌﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺷﺭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‬
‫‪ www.lg.com‬ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻟﺫﺍ ﻳﺗﻌﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﻫﻲ ‪ Window XP‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ‪.Linux‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪94‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻟﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻛﻣﻭﺟﻪ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻣﻌﺭﻑ )‪ Wi-Fi (SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺧﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻌﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺷﺭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪http://www.android.com/tether#wifi‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪95‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﻁ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ ﻹﻗﺭﺍﻧﻬﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺭﺑﻁ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫• ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺧﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻌﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺷﺭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪http://www.android.com/tether#Bluetooth_tethering‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻭﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪96‬‬
‫ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺷﻐﻠﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺷﻐﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪VPN‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﻳﺔ ﺁﻣﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ‪ .intranet‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ )‪(VPN‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ‬
‫‪.VPN‬‬
‫• ﻳﺟﺏ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ )‪ (VPN‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪.VPN‬‬
‫• ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻗﻔﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻻﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻗﻔﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ )‪ ،(VPN‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺣﻔﻅ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ )‪(VPN‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ )‪ (VPN‬ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪.VPN‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ VPN‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﻔﻅ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪97‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ :‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺎﻣﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻋﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻐﻣﺔ ﺭﻧﻳﻥ ‪ /SIM1‬ﻧﻐﻣﺔ ﺭﻧﻳﻥ ‪ :SIM2‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻐﻣﺔ ﺭﻧﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻧﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﻧﻳﻥ‪ :‬ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﻧﻐﻣﺔ ﺭﻧﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‪ :‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻧﻐﻣﺔ ﺭﻧﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ‪ /SIM1‬ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ‪ :SIM2‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﺯﻋﺎﺝ‪ :‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻭﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺑﻭﻉ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ :LED‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪.LED‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ / SIM1‬ﺻﻭﺕ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ :SIM2‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻐﻣﺔ ﺭﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻧﻐﻣﺔ ﺭﻧﻳﻥ ﻟﻺﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺅﺛﺭ ﺻﻭﺗﻲ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﻠﺏ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪98‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻣﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﻣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﺹ ﻋﺭﻳﺽ‪ :‬ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻏﺎﻣ ًﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻕ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﻳﺢ‪ :‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﻟﻺﺟﻬﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ً‪ :‬ﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﻣﻼً ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ :‬ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺣﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻟﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺗﻪ ﻟﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻋﺩﻡ‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺗﺯﺍﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪99‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ‪ :LG‬ﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ‪.LG‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ :Google‬ﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻣﻼء ﺍﻟﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ‬
‫‪.Google‬‬
‫• ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺧﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻼﻡ ﻣﻧﻁﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺄﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺄﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻛﻲ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻣﻭﻗﻌﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺙ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻁﻠﺑﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻣﺅﺧﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﺳﺗﻬﻼﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺟﻝ ّ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ‪ :Google‬ﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺎﺕ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪.Google‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ .Google‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ‪ :‬ﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‪ :‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ ‪ :TalkBack‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻪ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻧﺹ ﻋﺭﻳﺽ‪ :‬ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻏﺎﻣ ًﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ :‬ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ‪ :‬ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻛﺳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻓﺄﺭﺓ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪ :‬ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺄﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‪ :‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻋﻛﺱ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻳﻥ ﻳﻌﺎﻧﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺿﻌﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪101‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ :‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻳﺭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ‪ :‬ﺭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺡ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺟﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻟﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ :LED‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪.LED‬‬
‫ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ :‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻪ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻭﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻛﺗﻡ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺧﻔﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﺗﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﻣﺧﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻕ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻌﻭﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﻳﺔ ‪ :Touch assistant‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻟﺗﺳﻬﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻣﺎءﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻌﻭﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻌﻭﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻌﻭﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺄﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺄﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻌﻭﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺳﺣﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻌﻭﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻣﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﻣﻼً ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻌﻭﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ ﻟﻣﺯﺍﻳﺎ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺎ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ‪ :‬ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪102‬‬
‫‪QuickButton‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ‪.QuickButton‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‪ QuickButton‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺣﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫• ‪ :Capture+‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ‪Google‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Google‬ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ‪.Google‬‬
‫ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺑﻊ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺑﻊ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺻﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‪ :‬ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻟﻔﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺻﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ ‪.QuickMemo+‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ :SD‬ﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺁﻣﻥ‪ :‬ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺩء‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺁﻣﻥ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪103‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ :SIM‬ﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ USIM‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ‬
‫)ﺭﻣﺯ ‪.(PIN‬‬
‫ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺋﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻣﺗﻳﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻣﺗﺟﺭ‬
‫‪.Play‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Trust agents‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺛﻭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﻁ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺑﺳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻛﻝ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪104‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ ﻣﺣﺩ ًﺩﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﻛﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻬﻼﻙ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻛﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻭﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻗﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻻﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳ ًﻘﺎ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻓﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﺋﺗﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻓﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪105‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺦ ﺇﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳًﺎ؛ ﻓﺄﻋﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺦ ﺇﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ‪ :LG Backup‬ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻅﻭﺭﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ‬
‫‪ LG Backup‬ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ ﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪ Google‬ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪ :‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﺔ‪ :‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻛﺎﻻﺳﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪106‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻐﺔ ‪LG‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺣﺑﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫‪LG Bridge‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪LG Bridge‬‬
‫‪ LG Bridge‬ﻫﻭ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ‪ LG‬ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺭﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ‪ LG Bridge‬ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ LG USB‬ﻫﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺿﺭﻭﺭﻱ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ‪ LG‬ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪.LG Bridge‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪LG Bridge‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻛﻳﺑﻝ ‪.USB‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻛﻳﺑﻝ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪108‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪ LG Bridge‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻣﺟﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺛﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ www.lg.com‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﺣﺳﺏ ﻓﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻲ ﺳﻲ ﺳﻳﻧﻙ )‪ LG Bridge (PC Sync‬ﻟﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪.LG Bridge‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ‪ LG‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ http://www.lg.com/common/index.jsp‬ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﻠﺩﻙ ﻭﻟﻐﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻼﺋﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ‪LG‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻷﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻳﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﺷﺄﻥ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﻣﻧﻙ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻝ ﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻡ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﻳﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻗﻳﺔ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺳﺑﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺧﻁﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺣﺗﻔﻅ ‪ LG‬ﺑﺣﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻟﻠﻁﺭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﻟﻠﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻁﺭﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪109‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ‪ LG‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺙ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺋﻲ )‪(OTA‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻟﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺭﻳﺣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪OTA‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﻳﺑﻝ ‪ .USB‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ‪ LG‬ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ – ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻭﺃﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ‪ - DRM‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﺧﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﻓﺈﻥ ‪ LG‬ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻙ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳًﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ LG‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪110‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺋﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺍﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺳﺭﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻭﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺑﻌﺽ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺣﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻧﻔﺳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪/‬ﻓُﻘﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺿﻌﻳﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻣﻔﺗﻭﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻠﻪ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﻳﺭ ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫<‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ < ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ < ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﻠﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪111‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ٍ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺗﺩﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻓﻭﻟﺗﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻳﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ‪LG‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻗﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻗﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﻔﺗﺢ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻠﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻛﺎﻟﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺕ‬
‫ﻓﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻐﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﻳﻁ‬
‫ﺑﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﻳﻁ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪112‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻣﺗﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺟﻣّﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺟﻣّﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻭﻗﻔﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺣَ ﻲ ﺧﻔﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻥ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻧﺟﺢ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣ ّﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻ ّﻧﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ < ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ < ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻ ّﻧﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻ ّﻧﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺫ ّﻛﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺟﺭﻱ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﺳﺧﺎ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﺔ‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪Google‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺩﺧﻭﻟﻙ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪113‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻵﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻧﻙ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳُﺭﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻓُﻘﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣُﺳﺣﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻷﻱ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻳﻌﺭﻑ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Google‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﻟﺗﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﺣﻣﻲ ﻫﻭ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓُﻘﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺳُﺭﻕ ﻟﻛﻧﻙ ﻛﻧﺕ ﻗﺩ ﺿﺑﻁﺕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻟﻛﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ Google‬ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻌﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ‪ Google‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﺔ ﻭﻳﺿﻣﻥ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺷﺧﺹ‬
‫ﺗﺛﻕ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻧﺱَ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Google‬ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺃﺿﻔﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻊ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻁﻠﻘﺎ ً ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪114‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻣﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ‪ GPL‬ﻭ ‪ LGPL‬ﻭ ‪MPL‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺭﺍﺧﻳﺹ ﻣﻔﺗﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‬
‫‪.http://opensource.lge.com‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻣﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻛﻝ ﺃﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ﻭﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺧﻼء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﻟﻠﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ‪ LG Electronics‬ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻣﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺭﺹ ﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ‬
‫ﺑﺗﻛﻠﻔﺔ ﺗﻐﻁﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﻛﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ( ﻋﻧﺩ ﻁﻠﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .opensource@lge.com‬ﺇﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﻼﺙ )‪(3‬‬
‫ﺳﻧﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺷﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﻳﺔ )ﺭﻗﻡ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﻋﺎﻣﺔ < ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ © ﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪ 2017‬ﻣﻣﻠﻭﻛﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ .LG Electronics, Inc‬ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻭﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪ LG .‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ LG‬ﻫﻣﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺗﺎﻥ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪LG Group‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫™‪ Google‬ﻭ™‪ Google Maps‬ﻭ™‪ Gmail‬ﻭ™‪ YouTube‬ﻭ™‪Duo‬‬
‫ﻭ™‪ Google Play‬ﻭﻣﺗﺟﺭ ™‪ Google Play‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫‪.Google, Inc‬‬
‫®‪ Bluetooth‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Bluetooth SIG, Inc.‬ﻋﺎﻟﻣﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫®‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻫﻣﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺗﺎﻥ ﻟـ ‪.Wi-Fi Alliance‬‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﻣﻠﻙ ﻷﺻﺣﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻧﻳﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪115‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻥ ‪ LG Electronics‬ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺑﻪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ‪ LG-M710ds‬ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ‬
‫‪ .2014/53/EU‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫‪http://www.lg.com/global/declaration‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪116‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻛﻭﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺳﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﺑﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﻭﺻﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺳﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻣﻛﺗﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺩﻳﻧﺗﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﻳﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺣﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﻣﻳﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ )‪ (Hg‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺩﻣﻳﻭﻡ )‪ (Cd‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺻﺎﺹ )‪ (Pb‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ 0.0005%‬ﺯﺋﺑﻕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ 0.002%‬ﻛﺎﺩﻣﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺻﺎﺹ ‪.0.004%‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﻛﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻛﻭﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺳﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻠﺑﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﻭﺻﺣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺳﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﻳﺭﺟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻣﻛﺗﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺩﻳﻧﺗﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﻳﺕ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪117‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺷﮑﺭﻳﻡ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ‪ LG‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﺭﺩﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ً ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻣﺎ ً ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺕ ﻣﻁﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻣﻥ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻁﻣﺋﻥ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻣﻳﺷﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ‪ LG‬ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻁﺭﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺷﮑﻝ ﺑﻳﻧﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺩ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻑ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺭ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﻳﺵ ﻓﺭﺽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻳﺵ ﻓﺭﺽ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﻳﻪ ﻗﺑﻠﯽ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻐﻭ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺳﺅﺍﻟﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ً ﺑﺎ ﻣﺭﮐﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ‪ LG‬ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺻﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭ‪ ،‬ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ً ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻧﺑﻊ ﻏﻳﺭﺭﺳﻣﯽ ﻧﺻﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﺭﺳﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺧﺭﺍﺏ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﺍﻗﺩﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺟﻭﺯ ‪ LG‬ﻭ ﺿﻣﺎﻧﺕ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻘﺽ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ‪ ،‬ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺿﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺻﺎﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﻓﺭﻕ ﮐﻧﻧﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻁﻼﻉ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻗﺑﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺟﻭﺯ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺻﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ ﻭ ﻫﺭﮔﻭﻧﻪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻳﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻡ ﺗﻔﮑﻳﮏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺻﺭﻑ ﺗﺟﺎﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺍﻫﺩﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﺣﻕ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻟﻐﻭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻼً ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻝ ﻫﺳﺗﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻧﯽ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭی ﻟﺣﺎﻅ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺁﭘﻠﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻫﻣﮕﺎﻣﺳﺎﺯی ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ ﻫﺎی ﻣﮑﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭی ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻧﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻁﺭﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻳﺎﺯﻫﺎﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻼﻣﻳﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺛﺎﻟﺙ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺟﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁ‪ :‬ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﺟﺯﺋﯽ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺗﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﻼﻣﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻁﺎﻟﺏ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻣﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺅﺛﺭ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻻﺕ ﺿﺩ ﺁﺏ‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﻗﻁﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫ﻧﺻﺏ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫‪QuickMemo+‬‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﭼﻧﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫‪QSlide‬‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻁﺎﻟﺏ‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪43‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫‪46‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫‪48‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺗﻥ‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍ‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫ﻣﺯﺍﺣﻡ ﻧﺷﻭﻳﺩ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫ﻧﺻﺏ ﻭ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪90‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ‬
‫‪90‬‬
‫ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪59‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻥ‬
‫‪ 102‬ﺻﺩﺍ ﻭ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ‬
‫‪63‬‬
‫ﭘﻳﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ 103‬ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ‬
‫‪64‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫‪ 104‬ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬
‫‪72‬‬
‫ﮔﺎﻟﺭی‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ‬
‫‪76‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ‬
‫‪77‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‬
‫‪78‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻳﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‬
‫‪79‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺕ‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪80‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻳﺭی ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﯽ‬
‫‪80‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ‬
‫‪81‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫‪113‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ‪LG‬‬
‫‪81‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻑ ﺍﻡ‬
‫‪113‬‬
‫‪LG Bridge‬‬
‫‪114‬‬
‫‪82‬‬
‫‪LG Health‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ‬
‫‪83‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫‪116‬‬
‫ﺳﺅﺍﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺗﺩﺍﻭﻝ‬
‫‪119‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﺿﺩ ﺳﺭﻗﺕ‬
‫‪85‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﻳﻑ‬
‫‪85‬‬
‫‪LG Backup‬‬
‫‪86‬‬
‫‪RemoteCall Service‬‬
‫‪86‬‬
‫‪Chrome‬‬
‫‪87‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎی ‪Google‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻁﺎﻟﺏ‬
‫‪ 120‬ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﻣﻧﯽ )ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﻧﺎﺳﻪ ﻣﻘﺭﺭﺍﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﭼﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﮑﯽ ﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻩ(‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻣﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺅﺛﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ً ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺕ ﻣﻁﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﺩﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺕ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺭﺭﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﻧﻘﺽ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﮔﺭﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﻣﺷﮑﻠﯽ ﭘﻳﺵ ﺁﻣﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺍﺑﺯﺍﺭ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮔﺯﺍﺭﺵ ﺧﻁﺎﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺁﻭﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﺍﺑﺯﺍﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻁﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻣﻠﻪ ﻗﺩﺭﺕ ﺳﻳﮕﻧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺷﻧﺎﺳﻪ ﺳﻠﻭﻟﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﯽ ﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻳﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻣﻊ ﺁﻭﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮔﺯﺍﺭﺵ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺭﺍی‬
‫ﮐﻣﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﻋﻠﺕ ﺧﻁﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻌﻣﻳﺭ ﺑﺭﮔﺭﺩﺍﻧﺩﻩ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻥ‬
‫ﮔﺯﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﻣﺭﮐﺯ ﺗﻌﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺟﺎﺯ ‪ LG‬ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻧﺭژی ﻓﺭﮐﺎﻧﺱ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻣﻭﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭﻳﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺟﺫﺏ ﻭﻳژﻩ )‪.(SAR‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻭﻧﻪﺍی ﻁﺭﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻘﺭﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻣﻭﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭﻳﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﺑﺗﻧﯽ ﺑﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻋﻠﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻣﻠﻪ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺷﻳﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻣﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻭﻧﻪ ﺍی ﻁﺭﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻣﻧﯽ ﮐﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻓﺭﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﺭﻓﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻥ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺳﻼﻣﺗﯽ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝﻫﺎی ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻣﻭﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی‬
‫ﻣﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ »ﺿﺭﻳﺏ ﺟﺫﺏ ﻭﻳژﻩ« ﻳﺎ ‪ ،SAR‬ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺳﺕ ﻫﺎی ‪ SAR‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺗﺎﻧﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺭﻳﻥ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻧﻳﺭﻭی ﺗﺄﻳﻳﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻧﺩﻫﺎی ﻓﺭﮐﺎﻧﺱ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭﭼﻪ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺳﻁﻭﺡ ‪ SAR‬ﻣﺩﻝﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ‪ LG‬ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﻣﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻭﻧﻪﺍی ﻁﺭﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝﻫﺎی ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻣﻭﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ‪ SAR‬ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﮐﻣﻳﺳﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻠﯽ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﺍﺑﺭ ﺗﺷﺷﻌﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻳﻭﻧﻳﺯﻩ‬
‫)‪ ،(ICNIRP‬ﺑﺭﺍﺑﺭ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﺭﮐﻳﻠﻭﮔﺭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺩﺭ ‪ 10‬ﮔﺭﻡ ﺑﺎﻓﺕ ﺑﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺭﻳﻥ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ SAR‬ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺩﻝ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﺎﺭ ﮔﻭﺵ ‪ 0.454‬ﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﺭ‬
‫ﮐﻳﻠﻭﮔﺭﻡ )‪ 10‬ﮔﺭﻡ( ﺍﺳﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺩﻥ ‪ 1.540‬ﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﺭ ﮐﻳﻠﻭﮔﺭﻡ )‪ 10‬ﮔﺭﻡ( ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﻓﺭﮐﺎﻧﺱ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭﻳﯽ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩی ﺭﻭی ﮔﻭﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ 5‬ﻣﻳﻠﻳﻣﺗﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺑﺩﻥ ﺗﺑﻌﻳﺕ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺟﺎی ﻣﻭﺑﺎﻳﻝ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻳﻑ ﮐﻣﺭی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺣﺎﻭی ﻗﻁﻌﺎﺕ ﻓﻠﺯی ﺑﻭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺳﺕ ﺣﺩﺍﻗﻝ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻣﻳﻠﻳﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍی ﻳﺎ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮐﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭی ﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍی ﻳﺎ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﻕ ﺑﻳﻔﺗﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺭﺍﻫﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺕ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫• ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﻳﻳﺩ ‪ LG‬ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ LG .‬ﻫﻳﭼﮕﻭﻧﻪ ﺿﻣﺎﻧﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺑﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺭﺍﺑﯽ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺛﺎﻟﺙ ﻧﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺧﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺻﺎﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﻗﺑﻠﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﮐﻳﺩﺍً ﺧﻭﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﻧﺎﻧﭼﻪ ﮔﻭﺷﯽ ﻧﻳﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻣﻳﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﮑﻧﺳﻳﻥ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺟﺎﺯ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻣﻳﺭﺍﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻼﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪ LG‬ﺗﺣﺕ ﭘﻭﺷﺵ ﺿﻣﺎﻧﺕ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺗﻧﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﻣﻳﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻗﻁﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺑﻭﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻁﻌﺎﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻭﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺭﻁﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺣﺎﻅ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩی ﺑﺎ ﻗﻁﻌﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺷﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻳﮑﺳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮔﻭﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻧﺎﺑﻊ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﺑﺧﺎﺭی‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺎﻕ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭی ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ ﮔﻭﺷﯽ ﻧﻳﺎﻓﺗﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮔﻭﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺭﺯﺵ ﻳﺎ ﺗﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻧﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﻩﺍی ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺏ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻣﺎ ً‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺛﻼً‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻳﻣﺎﺭﺳﺗﺎﻥ ﺧﻭﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﮔﺭﻧﻪ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﭘﺯﺷﮑﯽ ﺣﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺕ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻧﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﺩ ﺑﺎﻋﺙ ﺑﺭﻕ‬
‫ﮔﺭﻓﺗﮕﯽ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺍً ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﺭﺳﺎﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﮔﻭﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻧﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ ﭘﺭﻫﻳﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻭﻥ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮔﻭﺷﯽ ﺩﺍﻍ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻋﺙ ﺁﺗﺵ ﺳﻭﺯی ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺧﺷﮏ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻣﻳﺯ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺳﻁﻭﺡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ )ﺍﺯ ﻣﺣﻠﻭﻟﻬﺎی ﭘﺎک ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﺑﻧﺯﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻳﻧﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﮑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺛﺎﺛﻳﻪ ﻧﺭﻡ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻧﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻬﻭﻳﻪ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺑﺭﺧﻭﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮔﻭﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﺩﻭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺑﺎﺭ ﻏﻠﻳﻅ ﺧﻭﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻣﺟﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎی ﺍﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺑﻠﻳﺕﻫﺎی ﺣﻣﻝ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻧﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻭﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﯽ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻝ ﻧﻭک ﺗﻳﺯ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﻧﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﻣﯽﺭﺳﺎﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻁﻭﺑﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﻟﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﻫﺩﻓﻭﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﯽ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﺗﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﺩﺳﺕ ﻧﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﻋﺎﺩی ﺍﺯ ﺧﻭﺩ ﮔﺭﻣﺎ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﺩ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻁﻭﻻﻧﯽ ﻭ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻭﺳﺕ ﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺗﻬﻭﻳﻪ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎﻋﺙ ﺳﻭﺧﺗﮕﯽ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺭﺍﺣﺗﯽ ﭘﻭﺳﺕ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻧﺎﺑﺭﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻳﺱ ﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻭﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺧﺷﮏ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻌﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺧﺷﮏ‬
‫ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﻓﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻳﮑﺭﻭﻓﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺷﻭﺍﺭ ﻧﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻣﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺅﺛﺭ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﻣﺅﺛﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺯﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﮑﯽ‬
‫ﻫﻣﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﺩ ﺑﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺟﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﭘﺯﺷﮑﯽ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺯﺷﮑﯽ ﺧﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﺯﺷﮏ ﻣﺷﻭﺭﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺩﮔﺎﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺿﺭﺑﺎﻥ ﻗﻠﺏ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻧﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺩﺍﻗﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ 15‬ﺳﺎﻧﺗﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺭی ﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺿﺭﺑﺎﻥ ﻗﻠﺏ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻭﻩ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺿﺭﺑﺎﻥ ﻗﻠﺏ ﺟﻠﻭﮔﻳﺭی ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻧﻭﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺭﻗﻪ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻝ ﮐﻣﮏ ﺷﻧﻭﺍﻳﯽ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺭ ﻣﺟﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﻼﻝ ﮔﺭﺩﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺟﺯﺋﯽ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻩ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ 0‬ﻭ ‪ 40‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺗﯽﮔﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺩ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎﻋﺙ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺗﯽ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻣﻧﯽ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﺍﻧﻧﺩﮔﯽ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺭﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻭﺍﺣﯽ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺭﺍﻧﻧﺩﮔﯽ ﺧﻭﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻣﻪ ﺣﻭﺍﺱ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻧﻧﺩﮔﯽ ﺑﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭼﻧﺎﻧﭼﻪ ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁ ﺭﺍﻧﻧﺩﮔﯽ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺣﻝ ﺍﻣﻧﯽ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭک ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﺭژی ﻓﺭﮐﺎﻧﺱ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭﻳﯽ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺭ ﺑﺭﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﮑﯽ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻳﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭﻫﺎی ﺧﻭﺩﺭﻭ ﻭ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﻣﻧﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻭﺩﺭﻭ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﺟﻬﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻳﺳﻪ ﻫﻭﺍ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﻧﺻﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻳﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺣﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻌﯽ ﺑﺭ ﺳﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻧﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺯﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻧﮑﺭﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺩی ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﮔﻭﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﻠﻧﺩ ﻧﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﺗﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﺍﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺧﻭﺩ ﻧﻳﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﺍﻣﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻫﺳﺗﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺳﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻣﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺅﺛﺭ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺻﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻧﻭﺍﻳﯽ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺟﻠﻭﮔﻳﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻧﻭﺍﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺩﺕ ﻁﻭﻻﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺧﻳﻠﯽ ﺑﻠﻧﺩ ﮔﻭﺵ‬
‫ﻧﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺩﺗﯽ ﻁﻭﻻﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺑﻠﻧﺩ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺷﻧﻭﺍﻳﯽ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻧﺎﺑﺭﺍﻳﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﮔﻭﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻧﺎﺭ ﮔﻭﺵ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺍﺟﺗﻧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍی ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﻭ ﻧﻳﺯ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﯽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺩﻓﻭﻥ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺍﻓﺭﺍﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺻﺣﺑﺕ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻧﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻧﻭﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺭﺩی ﮐﻪ ﮐﻧﺎﺭ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻧﺷﺳﺗﻪ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺁﻫﻧﮕﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻭﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻧﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﮐﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﮔﻭﺷﯽ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻫﺩﻓﻭﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻧﻭﺍﻳﯽ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﺭﺳﺎﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻁﻌﺎﺕ ﺷﻳﺷﻪ ﺍی‬
‫ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺧﺵﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻧﺱ ﺷﻳﺷﻪ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻁﺣﯽ ﺳﻔﺕ ﺑﻳﻔﺗﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺷﮑﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﻗﻁﻌﻪ ﺷﻳﺷﻪ ﺍی ﺷﮑﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺳﺕ ﻧﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﻌﯽ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻳﺷﻪ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ ﻣﺟﺎﺯ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻧﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻳﻪ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺣﻝﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﻳﺕ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺕ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻳﻪ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺭﺭﺍﺕ ﭘﻳﺭﻭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺣﻝﻫﺎی ﺳﻭﺧﺕ ﮔﻳﺭی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺟﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺳﻭﺧﺗﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻳﻣﻳﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺣﻣﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﻧﻔﺟﺭﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺳﻣﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻧﻘﻠﻳﻪ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﻭﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻭﺍﭘﻳﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﯽ ﺳﻳﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻼﻻﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻭﺍﭘﻳﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻭﺍﺭ ﺷﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻭﺍﭘﻳﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻭﺍﭘﻳﻣﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺯﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﮐﺳﺏ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﭘﺭﻭﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻣﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺅﺛﺭ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﮐﻭﺩﮐﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﻣﻥ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺱ ﮐﻭﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺧﺭﺩﺳﺎﻝ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﻁﻌﺎﺕ ﮐﻭﭼﮑﯽ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺟﺩﺍ ﺷﺩﻥ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﮐﻭﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺑﻠﻌﻳﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺙ ﺧﻔﮕﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﻁﺭﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭی ﺗﻣﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﻁﺭﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻫﻣﻪ ﺷﺑﮑﻪﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻧﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻧﺎﺑﺭﺍﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻫﺭﮔﺯ ﻧﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﺗﻣﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺍﺿﻁﺭﺍﺭی ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﮑﺎ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻣﺧﺎﺑﺭﺍﺗﯽ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﻭ ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫• ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺟﺩﺩﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺧﻼﻑ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺭی‪ ،‬ﻫﻳﭻ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺍی ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻧﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺻﺩﻣﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎی ‪ LG‬ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎی ‪ LG‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﻭﻧﻪ ﺍی ﻁﺭﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﻋﻣﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺩﺍﮐﺛﺭ ﺑﺭﺳﺎﻧﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻣﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﮐﻭﺗﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺧﻭﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﯽ ﻧﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺭﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻳﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺩﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺟﺩﺩﺍً ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻣﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻳﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﻳﺵ ﻳﺎﺑﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﻧﻭﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺧﻭﺭﺷﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺳﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺭﻁﻭﺏ ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻭﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺳﻳﺎﺭ ﮔﺭﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻧﺎﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﻧﺎﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻣﻧﺟﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﻫﺎی ﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻁﺑﻕ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺩﺍﺯﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻣﻳﺷﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﻣﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﻅﻭﺭ ﺻﺭﻓﻪ ﺟﻭﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ ﻧﻳﺭﻭی ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺭﻳﺯ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻁﻭﻝ ﻋﻣﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺑﻪ ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﮕﻭﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﻭ‬
‫ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁ ﻣﺣﻳﻁﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻗﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻫﻳﭻ ﺷﯽء ﻧﻭک ﺗﻳﺯی ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﺩﻧﺩﺍﻥ ﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺧﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﭘﻳﺩﺍ ﻧﮑﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺕ ﻣﻧﺟﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺵ ﺳﻭﺯی ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻣﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺅﺛﺭ‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻣﻥﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﺧﺻﯽ‬
‫• ﺍﻁﻣﻳﻧﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﺧﺻﯽ ﺧﻭﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺕ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻭء ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺱ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺟﻠﻭﮔﻳﺭی ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻣﻳﺷﻪ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﻭﺩ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ LG .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺑﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻝ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻣﺎ ً ﺍﺯ ﻫﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﻭﺩ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺭ ﮔﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﻭء ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺱ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺟﻠﻭﮔﻳﺭی ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻧﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﺟﻭﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺕ ﺑﺧﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻧﺩﻳﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﺧﺻﯽ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺳﺎﺏﻫﺎی ﺷﺧﺻﯽ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﻣﻧﻅﻡ ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻫﺭ ﮔﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﻭء‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﺧﺻﯽ ﺧﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺑﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻣﻔﻘﻭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺭﻗﺕ ﺷﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻭﺭﺍً ﮐﻠﻣﻪ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺧﺻﯽ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻣﻥ ﺑﻣﺎﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﻧﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﺷﻧﺎﺱ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫• ﻳﮏ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭼﻧﺎﻧﭼﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭی ﺑﻪ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﻣﻧﯽ ﺧﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﻣﮏ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮑﺗﺭﻳﻥ ﻣﺭﮐﺯ ﻓﺭﻭﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺭﮐﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺟﺎﺯ ‪ LG Electronics‬ﺑﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﻟﻳﺗﻳﻭﻡ ﻳﻭﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻗﻁﻌﻪ ﺧﻁﺭﻧﺎک ﺍﺳﺕ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﺩ ﺑﺎﻋﺙ ﺟﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻓﺭﺍﺩ ﻏﻳﺭﻣﺗﺧﺻﺹ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﺩ ﺑﺎﻋﺙ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺩﻳﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﻣﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺅﺛﺭ‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻻﺕ ﺿﺩ ﺁﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﻔﺎﻅﺕ ﻣﺟﺎﺯ‪ ،IP68‬ﺿﺩ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﺍﺑﺭ ﮔﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺕﻫﺎی ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺿﺩ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﺧﺎک ﺩﺭ ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺳﺕ )ﺑﺭ ﻁﺑﻕ ﻧﻳﺎﺯﻣﻧﺩیﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻁﺑﻘﻪﺑﻧﺩی ‪ IP68‬ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺭﺡ ﺍﺳﺗﺎﻧﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻳﻥﺍﻟﻣﻠﻠﯽ ‪ IEC 60529‬ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺕ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﭘﻭﺷﺵﻫﺎ ]ﮐﺩ ‪[IP‬؛ ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁ ﺗﺳﺕ‪ 35-15 :‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺗﯽﮔﺭﺍﺩ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 106-86‬ﮐﻳﻠﻭﭘﺎﺳﮑﺎﻝ‪ 1.5 ،‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺩﺕ ‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﻪ(‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁ ﺗﺳﺕ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻧﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﺗﺎﻳﺞ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﺭﻏﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﺍ ﺑﻭﺩﻥ ﺭﺗﺑﻪ ‪ ،IP68‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ‪LG‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺕ ﻧﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﭘﺫﻳﺭ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ً ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ ﻫﺭ ﮔﻭﻧﻪ ﺁﺳﻳﺑﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩی ﺭﺥ ﺩﻫﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻋﺙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪) LDI‬ﻧﺷﺎﻧﮕﺭ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﺍﺑﺭ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﺭﻁﻭﺑﺕ(‬
‫ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ ‪ LDI‬ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﮐﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻫﺭ ﮔﻭﻧﻪ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻳﮕﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻣﻳﺭ ﺫﮐﺭ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺿﻣﺎﻧﺕﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺟﺩ ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁ ﻧﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺑﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺣﻳﻁﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺑﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻁﻭﺑﺕ ﺑﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯﻩ ﺟﻠﻭﮔﻳﺭی‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺣﻳﻁﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻳﭻ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻳﻣﻳﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺯ ﺁﺏ )ﺻﺎﺑﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻩ( ﻓﺭﻭ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺏ ﺷﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﺁﺏ ﺩﺭﻳﺎ ﻓﺭﻭ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭼﺷﻣﻪ ﺁﺏ ﮔﺭﻡ ﻓﺭﻭ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻧﺎ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺭﻭی ﺷﻥ )ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺣﻝ( ﻳﺎ ﮔﻝ ﻭ ﻻی‬
‫ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻧﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺏ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1.5‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺍﺯ ‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺏ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻧﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻳﺱ ﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻳﮑﺭﻭﻓﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﻧﺩﮔﻭ ﻭ ﺳﻭﮐﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭی ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺧﺷﮏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻧﺎﻧﭼﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﺎﻧﺗﺎﻥ ﺧﻳﺱ ﺷﺩﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺧﺷﮏ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺁﺏ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﭘﺎﺷﻳﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ )ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺷﻳﺭ ﺁﺏ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺭ ﺩﻭﺵ( ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻧﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺩﺕ ﻁﻭﻻﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺏ ﻓﺭﻭ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻁﻭﺭی ﻁﺭﺍﺣﯽ ﻧﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﺍﺑﺭ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺁﺏ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﺍﺑﺭ ﺑﺭﻕ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﮕﯽ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻧﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻳﻧﺩﺍﺯﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﺭﻕ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﮕﯽ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻧﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻳﻧﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﻣﯽﺑﻳﻧﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺭ ﺍﺛﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺷﺗﯽ ﺁﺏ‪ ،‬ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺷﮑﻝ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽﻫﺎی ﺿﺩ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﺧﺎک ﺑﻭﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﻣﺷﮑﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺧﻳﺱ ﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺭﻡ ﻭ ﺗﻣﻳﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻣﻼً ﺧﺷﮏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻧﺎﻧﭼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺧﻳﺱ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻭ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺩﺭﺳﺕ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻧﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﯽ ﺿﺩ ﺁﺏ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻳﻡﮐﺎﺭﺕ‪/‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺧﻳﺱ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺏ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻳﻡﮐﺎﺭﺕ‪/‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺧﻭﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺏ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻁﻭﺑﺕ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‪/‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺣﺎﻭی ﻻﺳﺗﻳﮏ ]ﺑﺳﺗﻪﺑﻧﺩی[ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺧﺎک‪،‬‬
‫ﺁﺏ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻁﻭﺑﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺟﻠﻭﮔﻳﺭی ﻣﻳﮑﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻻﺳﺗﻳﮏ ]ﺑﺳﺗﻪﺑﻧﺩی[ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‬
‫ﭼﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﻋﺙ ﻣﻳﺷﻭﺩ ﮔﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎک‪ ،‬ﺁﺏ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻁﻭﺑﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﺩﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝﻫﺎ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺿﻣﺎﻧﺕﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﻗﻁ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﺿﺎی ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻧﯽ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺑﺯﺍﺭ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮑﺵ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮑﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮑﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮑﺵ ﭘﻭﺷﻳﺩﻩﺍﻳﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮑﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺕ ﻧﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﻋﺎﺩی‪ ،‬ﻣﻁﻣﺋﻥ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮑﺵ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺛﺑﺕ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍی ﻗﻔﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﻟﺭی ﻳﺎ ‪.QuickMemo+‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﺭﻓﯽ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺧﺭﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻳﻳﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﺄﻳﻳﺩ ﻫﻭﻳﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﭼﻧﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺧﻳﻠﯽ ﺷﺑﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺷﻧﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ‬
‫ﺩﻗﺕ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻻﻳﻝ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﮐﺎﻫﺵ ﻳﺎﺑﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺩﻗﺕ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺩﺍﮐﺛﺭ ﺑﺭﺳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻳﮏ ﺳﻧﺳﻭﺭ ﺍﺛﺭﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﻓﻠﺯی ﻣﺛﻝ ﺳﮑﻪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﻧﺑﻳﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺁﺏ‪ ،‬ﮔﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎک ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺍﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﻧﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺍﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻣﻳﺯ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺧﺷﮏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺯﺧﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻓﺭﻭ ﺑﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺏ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻳﮑﻧﻭﺍﺧﺗﯽ‬
‫ﻧﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻭک ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺗﻣﺎ ً ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﮐﻝ ﺳﻁﺢ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﭘﻭﺷﺎﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﻫﺭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺛﺑﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻳﮏ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﮑﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺑﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﮑﻥ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺛﺑﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﮔﺫﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﻫﻭﺍی ﺍﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺧﺷﮏ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻳﺳﻳﺗﻪ ﺳﺎﮐﻥ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﺩ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﻫﻭﺍی ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﺍﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺧﺷﮏ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﮑﻥ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﮑﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺟﺳﻡ ﻓﻠﺯی ﻣﺛﻝ ﺳﮑﻪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻳﺳﻳﺗﻪ ﺳﺎﮐﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫ﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﺷﻧﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫ﺛﺑﺕ ﻭ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻧﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻧﺑﺎﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﻳﺩﺍ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺛﺑﺕ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻧﺳﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﺩ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ‬
‫ﺩﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻗﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺣﺗﻣﺎ ً ﻧﻭک ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﮐﻝ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺳﻧﺳﻭﺭ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭘﻭﺷﺎﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺑﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﮑﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﺑﺕ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺗﺎﺋﻳﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺛﺑﺕ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺑﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁ ﺧﻭﺑﯽ ﻧﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻭﺑﯽ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁﯽ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻧﺷﻭﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﭼﻧﺩ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺑﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺛﺑﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﺷﺧﺹ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻧﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﮐﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی‬
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍی ﻗﻔﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﺷﺧﺹ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻧﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻭی ﻧﻣﺎﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻧﻣﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻟﻑ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍکﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻋﮑﺱﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡﻫﺎی ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎﺩ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫• ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﻧﻣﺎﺩ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻭ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﻧﺻﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪QuickMemo+‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ‪QuickMemo+‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﭘﻳﺷﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕﻫﺎی ﺧﻼﻗﺎﻧﻪﺍی ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭ ﺗﺻﺎﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕﻫﺎی ﻣﻌﻣﻭﻟﯽ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻣﯽﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ‬
‫‪ QuickMemo+‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺁﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺩ ﻟﻐﻭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺁﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻟﻐﻭ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺩ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﺎﻧﺗﺎﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﺑﻧﻭﻳﺳﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺕ ﻧﻭﻳﺱ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎک ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻧﻔﯽ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺧﺵ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﺩﺳﺕ ﻧﻭﻳﺱ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﭼﺭﺧﺎﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎک ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﺑﮏ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﺷﺗﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺱ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺱ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺎﺋﻳﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪ QuickMemo+‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﮑﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﭘﻳﻭﺳﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﻧﻭﺷﺗﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺱ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺱ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﺑﻧﻭﻳﺳﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺗﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺭ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺩﺭﺝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﺷﺗﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺱ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺛﺑﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻣﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﮑﺱ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻁﺭﺡ ﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ ﭘﺱ ﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺯﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺱ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﺑﻧﻭﻳﺳﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺣﻝ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫• ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ‪ QuickMemo+‬ﻳﺎ ﮔﺎﻟﺭی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻣﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ‬
‫ﭘﻳﺵ ﻓﺭﺽ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺭﻭﻩ ﺑﻧﺩی ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺭ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪ QuickMemo+‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻣﻧﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﻭی‬
‫• ﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﻫﻣﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪ QuickMemo+‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻥ‪ :‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ‪ QuickMemo+‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻋﮑﺱ‪ :‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﮑﺱ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ‪ :+‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ‬
‫• ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ‪ :‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮔﺭﻭﻩ ﺑﻧﺩی ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ :‬ﺩﺳﺗﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺩﺳﺗﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺑﻧﺩی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ‪ QuickMemo+‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻏﻳﺭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺣﺩﺍﻗﻝ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻧﺩ ﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﭼﻧﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﭼﻧﺩ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻔﮑﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ﻣﺟﺯﺍ‪ ،‬ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭘﺱ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺧﻳﺭ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﭼﻧﺩ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﭼﻧﺩ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﭼﻧﺩ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺑﺭﺧﯽ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻣﻠﻪ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺧﻳﺭﺍً ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩﺍﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺧﻳﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪QSlide‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ QSlide‬ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺍﺟﺭﺍی ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪.QSlide‬‬
‫• ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ‪ QSlide‬ﺭﺍ ﻏﻳﺭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻳﺕ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ‪ QSlide‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ‪ QSlide‬ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻫﺎی ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ‪ QSlide‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻧﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯﻩ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ‪ QSlide‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ‬
‫‪21‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﮔﻧﺟﺎﻧﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫• ﭘﻳﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫• ﻫﺩﺳﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ‬
‫• ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭی ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻣﻳﺷﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ‪ LG Electronics‬ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺕ ﺳﺎﻳﺯ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﺩﮐﻧﻧﺩﮔﺎﻥ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻋﺙ ﺑﺭﻭﺯ ﻧﻘﺹ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺗﺣﺕ‬
‫ﭘﻭﺷﺵ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ ﺗﻌﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪ LG‬ﻧﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﻫﺭﮐﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻡ ﮐﺭﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﻧﺩﻩ ﺍی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺭﻳﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺧﺭﻳﺩ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻝ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺭﮐﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺷﺗﺭی ‪ LG‬ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺧﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭی‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺕ ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﻧﺩﮔﺎﻥ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺭﮐﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺷﺗﺭی ‪ LG‬ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﮑﻝ ﻅﺎﻫﺭی ﻭ ﻣﺷﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺷﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ‪ LG Electronics‬ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺛﺎﻟﺙ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﺭﺳﺎﻧﺩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺑﺏ ﺑﺭﻭﺯ ﻧﻘﺹ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﻗﻁﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﮔﻭﺷﯽ‬
‫ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭی‪/‬ﻧﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ‬
‫‪ LED‬ﺍﻋﻼﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻧﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻝ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩﻫﺎی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺻﺩﺍ )‪(-/+‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪/‬ﺳﻧﺳﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺛﺭﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ microSD /‬ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻳﮑﺭﻭﻓﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻳﺵ ﻫﺩﺳﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻧﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﻘﺏ‬
‫ﻓﻠﺵ‬
‫ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ‪NFC‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻧﺩﮔﻭ‬
‫ﭘﻭﺭﺕ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‪/‬ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪24‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭی‪/‬ﻧﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ‬
‫ ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭی‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﺑﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪،‬‬‫ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭی ﻧﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﻫﺎی ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻳﺭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﻩ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺳﻳﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻧﺎﻳﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭ‬‫ﻣﺣﻳﻁ‪ ،‬ﺷﺩﺕ ﻧﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺟﺯﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩﻫﺎی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺻﺩﺍ‬
‫ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻋﮑﺱ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ‬‫ﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻟﯽ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﮐﺎﻫﺵ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ )‪ (-‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‬‫ﺗﺎ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﻳﺵ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ )‪ (+‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻋﮑﺱ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ‪ +‬ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻝ‬
‫ ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻫﺳﺗﮕﯽ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺷﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ‬‫ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪/‬ﺳﻧﺳﻭﺭ ﺍﺛﺭﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ‬
‫ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭﻧﺩ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺷﺎﻳﯽ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩﺗﺭ‬‫ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺟﻬﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ .‬ﺳﻌﯽ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺩﺍﺷﺗﻥ ﻗﺎﺏ ﭘﺷﺗﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻧﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺷﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی‬
‫ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﻳﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﺷﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺟﻬﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺁﻧﺗﻥ ‪ NFC‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ .‬ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﺗﻥ ‪ NFC‬ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺷﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﭘﻭﺷﻳﺩﻩ ﻧﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺳﻧﮕﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻧﻧﺷﻳﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻧﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭی ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪25‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻳﺱ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﻣﺭﻁﻭﺏ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺗﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻧﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﻭﻻﻳﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻻﻳﻪ ﺭﻭﻳﯽ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅ‬
‫ﻭ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺯﻳﺭﻳﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻫﻣﻳﺷﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﺍﺑﺭ ﺷﮑﺳﺗﮕﯽ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻳﺵ ﻧﺻﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩی‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺧﺵ ﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻪ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻁﻭﻻﻧﯽ ﺗﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺩ ﻣﻌﻣﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ؛ ﺳﭘﺱ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ‪ :‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ :‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﻣﺟﺩﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻫﻭﺍﭘﻳﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻧﻳﺩ‪ :‬ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﺑﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺳﺩﻭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻣﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺗﻠﻔﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻭ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻧﺩ ﺑﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫ﻧﺻﺏ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻡﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺏ ﻧﻭک ﺗﻳﺯ ﺳﻭﺯﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝﺳﺎﺯی ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﻳﻡﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻳﻡﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮔﺭﻓﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺭﮐﺯ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ‪ LG‬ﺑﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽﻫﺎی ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﺍﺑﺭ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﺧﺎک ﺩﺭﺳﺕ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻧﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺳﻳﻧﯽ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭﺳﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﭘﻳﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﻭﺭﺍﺥ ﺭﻭی ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪27‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻥ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻁﻼﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻣﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪28‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻳﻡﮐﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎی ﻧﺎﻧﻭ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺷﮑﻠﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻣﻳﺷﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻳﻡﮐﺎﺭﺗﯽ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻭﻟﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻳﻡﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺧﻳﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻣﻳﺷﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺷﮏ ﺑﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻳﻡﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻁﻣﻳﻧﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫• ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻡ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﻪ ﮔﻡ ﺷﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺳﻳﺑﯽ ﺑﺭﺳﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﺷﮑﻝ ﺩﻳﮕﺭی ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ LG ،‬ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺗﯽ ﻧﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺁﺳﻳﺑﯽ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ microSD‬ﺑﺎ ﻅﺭﻓﻳﺕ ﺣﺩﺍﮐﺛﺭ ‪ 2‬ﺗﺭﺍﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﻭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺭﺧﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺍﺯ ‪ 32‬ﮔﻳﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ‪ exFAT‬ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﯽ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﺯﻧﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺭﺍﺏ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﭘﻳﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﻭﺭﺍﺥ ﺭﻭی ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻥ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻁﻼﻳﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻣﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ‬
‫)ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭی(‬
‫ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭی ﺍﺳﺕ ﻭ ﺟﺩﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﯽﺭﺳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻭﺷﺗﻥ ﻭ ﭘﺎک ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﮑﺭﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻁﻭﻝ ﻋﻣﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺵ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﯽ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﺯﻧﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺭﺍﺏ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺍﻳﻣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺩﺍ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻳﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺳﻭﺭﺍﺥ ﺭﻭی ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻥ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻋﺙ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﺭﻭﻧﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺭﺍﺏ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺳﻭء ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻣﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‪ LG ،‬ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺗﯽ ﻧﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎی ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻭﺭﺕ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭘﺱ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺭﻳﺯ ﺑﺭﻕ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻳﺱ ﺑﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺭﻁﻭﺏ ﺑﻭﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻣﻧﺟﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺗﺵﺳﻭﺯی‪ ،‬ﺷﻭک ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻳﮑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺻﺩﻣﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺗﻣﺎ ً ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺗﻣﺎ ً ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺗﺄﻳﻳﺩ ‪ LG‬ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺛﺎﻟﺙ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎﻋﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺳﺎﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺑﺭﻕ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﮕﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺟﻬﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ .‬ﺳﻌﯽ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺩﺍﺷﺗﻥ ﻗﺎﺏ ﭘﺷﺗﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻧﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪32‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺎﻣﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺭﻳﺯ ﺟﺩﺍ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻕ ﻏﻳﺭﺿﺭﻭﺭی ﺧﻭﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﮏ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺗﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺗﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺗﻭﺭ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺩﺭﺳﺕ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻧﮑﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﻭﺷﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺍﻳﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻟپ ﺗﺎپ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺳﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺗﻭﺭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺭﻳﺯ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻁﻭﻻﻧﯽﺗﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺎﺏ ‪ USB‬ﺧﻭﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻧﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻭﻟﺗﺎژ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺑﻧﺩی ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻅ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﺷﻭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫• ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﻓﻠﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺁﺏ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﭘﻳﺩﺍ ﻧﮑﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺗﻣﺎ ً ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ؛ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻝﻫﺎی ‪ USB‬ﻳﺎ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺿﻣﺎﻧﺕ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ LG‬ﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺯ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻟﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺑﺭﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻭﺷﺵ ﻧﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝﻫﺎی ﻣﻧﺩﺭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺗﺎﺑﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ ﭘﻳﺭﻭی ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻳﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻟﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻧﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‬
‫ﻁﻭﻝ ﻋﻣﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﮐﻡ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻋﻣﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﺱ ﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻐﻭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺩﺍﻗﻝ ﺑﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺑﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ®‪ Bluetooth‬ﻳﺎ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺭﺻﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺩ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻭﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﻭﺷﻧﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺩﺍﻗﻝ ﺑﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﺷﺩﻩﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺗﺧﻠﻳﻪ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﻧﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻧﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪33‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺣﻭﻩ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺁﺷﻧﺎ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻭک ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺭﺍ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺷﺗﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﭼﻧﺩ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻧﻭی ﺣﺎﻭی ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪34‬‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻭﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﺷﻪ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻧﻔﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺷﻳﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺭﺩی ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺟﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ؛ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ‬
‫ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﻭی ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺷﻳﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻭﺭﺍً ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﻭﻗﻔﻪﺍی ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﻳﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺱ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪35‬‬
‫ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮏ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮑﺩﻳﮕﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻡ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﻧﻔﯽ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻼً ﺭﻭی ﻧﻘﺷﻪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺱ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺎﻧﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻡ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﺍﺑﺭ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﻓﻳﺯﻳﮑﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺧﻭﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺁﻫﻧﺭﺑﺎﻳﯽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺻﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺭ ﻧﻭﺭﻫﺎی ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺎﺑﺵ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﻧﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻭﺭﺷﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻥ ﻫﺳﺗﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻧﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﺧﻳﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺧﻭﺍﻧﺩﻥ ﮐﺗﺎﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻧﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﻗﺩﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻭک ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﻭی ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮑﺵ ﭘﻭﺷﻳﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻭک ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺎﻧﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺗﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺧﻳﺱ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺭﻁﻭﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﺧﺭﻳﺩﺍﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻧﻼﻳﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺁﻓﻼﻳﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺗﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺩﺕ ﻁﻭﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎﻋﺙ ﺳﻭﺧﺗﮕﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺩﻥ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺩﺕ ﻁﻭﻻﻧﯽ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻣﯽﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ .‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺎ ً ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺭﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻫﻣﻪ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺟﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻫﻣﻪ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺻﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭼپ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻳﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻫﻣﻪ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺟﺕ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺕ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﻫﻭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺕ ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭی‬
‫‪Google‬‬
‫ﭘﻭﺷﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺣﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫• ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪37‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ‪ :‬ﻧﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺕ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﻫﻭﺍ‪ :‬ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﻫﻭﺍ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺕ ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭی ‪ :Google‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻭﺍژﻩﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻳﺩی ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﮔﻔﺗﺎﺭی ﻳﺎ ﻧﻭﺷﺗﺎﺭی‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻉ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪ Google‬ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻭﺷﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﮔﺭﻭﻩ ﺑﻧﺩی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﮐﻝ ﺑﻭﻡﻫﺎی ﻧﻘﺎﺷﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﻭی ﻧﻣﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﺭﺩﻩﺍﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﺩﺍﻳﺕ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﻣﺎﺩ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺑﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﺷﯽ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﭘﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ :‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻫﺭ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺧﻭﺍﻧﺩﻩ ﻧﺷﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎﺩ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻧﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﮕﻧﺎﻝ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺍﺳﺕ‬
‫ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺷﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻟﺭﺯﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺳﻁﺢ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻫﻭﺍﭘﻳﻣﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬
‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺑﻳﺻﺩﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ‬
‫‪ GPS‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪38‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ‬
‫• ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺷﮑﻝ ﻅﺎﻫﺭی ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﮐﻠﯽ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁﻪ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﮔﺎﻥ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻧﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﮐﺷﻳﺩﻥ ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻣﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻧﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺭﺗﺏﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﺟﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻧﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻣﺎﺩی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺷﺗﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺟﻬﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺕ ﻓﻳﺯﻳﮑﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻧﻣﺎﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺭﻭی ﭼﺭﺧﺵ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﭼﺭﺧﺷﯽ‬
‫ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭘﺱ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻫﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺑﻧﺩی ﻣﺟﺩﺩ ﻗﺎﺏ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭘﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻭﻳﺟﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭘﺱ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻭﭼﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﭘﺱ ﻣﺿﻣﻭﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻣﺿﻣﻭﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ؛ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭘﺱ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﻬﺎی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﻬﺎی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺻﺏ ﻣﺟﺩﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﭘﺎک ﺷﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭘﺱ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻁﺭﺡ ﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ ﭘﺱ ﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﻧﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺟﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﭘﺱﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻡ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻣﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺷﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺟﺕﻫﺎ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕﻫﺎﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻡ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﺎ ً ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺑﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻗﺳﻣﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺣﺫﻑ ﻧﻣﺎﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻧﻣﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪41‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺍی ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﺍی ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻧﺩ ﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻗﺩﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ؛ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻣﺕ‬
‫ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺫﻑ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﻬﺎی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻛﻧﻳﺩ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ‪ :‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ ﭘﺱﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺟﻠﻭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ‪ :‬ﺟﻠﻭﻩ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺏ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺭﺗﺏ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻁﺑﻕ‪ :‬ﻧﺣﻭﻩ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺑﻧﺩی ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺍی‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺑﻧﺩی ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺧﻔﯽ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺧﻔﯽ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﻫﺳﺗﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪42‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺩﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻼﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻭﺩ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺩﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻧﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﻭﺭﺍً ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻣﻳﻧﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻣﻧﯽ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻭﮔﻳﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﻧﺎﺧﻭﺍﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺑﺎﻩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭﺿﺭﻭﺭی‬
‫ﻟﻣﺱ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺻﺭﻓﻪ ﺟﻭﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﯽ ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻫﻳﭼﮑﺩﺍﻡ‪ :‬ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻳﺭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮔﺷﻭﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺟﺎﺭﻭﺑﯽ‪ :‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :Knock Code‬ﺑﺭ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﮕﻭی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻓﺿﺎﻫﺎی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﮕﻭ‪ :‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﮕﻭﻳﯽ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺩ ﭘﻳﻥ‪ :‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ ﻋﺩﺩی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﻣﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‪ :‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ ﺣﺭﻓﯽ ﻋﺩﺩی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺧﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﺧﻁﺎی ﺷﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ‪ 5‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺭﺳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺕ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﻣﺳﺩﻭﺩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪43‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﺍﻳﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﮐﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪﺍی ‪ ،Knock Code‬ﺍﻟﮕﻭ‪ ،‬ﮐﺩ ﭘﻳﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻗﻔﻝ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻭﻧﻪﺍی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﻅﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﮔﺭﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻳﭻ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺍﺿﻁﺭﺍﺭی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﮐﻠﻣﻪ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺷﺎﻳﯽ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺭﺍﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺧﺻﯽ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :Smart Lock‬ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻁﻣﻳﻧﺎﻧﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺑﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫ﻫﺭﮐﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ‪ :‬ﻁﺭﺡ ﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ ﭘﺱﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺎﻋﺕ‪ :‬ﻧﻭﻉ ﺳﺎﻋﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻳﺎﻧﺑﺭﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﻳﺎﻧﺑﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻳﺎﻧﺑﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺟﻠﻭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ‪ :‬ﺟﻠﻭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﻗﻔﻝ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﻳﻣﻳﺷﻥ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﻫﻭﺍ‪ :‬ﺗﺻﺎﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺣﺭک ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﻫﻭﺍی ﻣﮑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﮔﻣﺷﺩﻩ‪ :‬ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺍﺿﻁﺭﺍﺭی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺎﻳﻣﺭ ﻗﻔﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﺩﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻼﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻭﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺭﻋﺕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻝ‬
‫ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻭﺭﺍً ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪44‬‬
‫• ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻥ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ‪ LG‬ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﺻﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺗﯽ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻭک ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﺧﻧﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﻧﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ‪ ،KnockON‬ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺭﭼﺳﺏ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻳﭻ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺭی ﺟﻠﻭی ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻭﺳﻁ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻗﺩﺭﺕ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﮐﺎﻫﺵ ﻳﺎﺑﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Knock Code‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ‪ Knock Code‬ﻣﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻭﺍﻟﯽ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺎ ً ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Knock Code‬ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ‪ KnockOn‬ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻣﺎ ً ﺑﺎ ﻧﻭک ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ‪Knock Code‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪ Knock Code‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺑﺭ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﮕﻭی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺑﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺍﻳﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ‪ Knock Code‬ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺑﻌﺩی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ Knock Code‬ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﺄﻳﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺄﻳﻳﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ‪ Knock Code‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ‪ Knock Code‬ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺷﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪ Knock Code ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﺷﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﮏ ‪ Knock Code‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺭ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻑ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﺧﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻻﻥ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ :‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﮐﺎﻣﻝ‪ :‬ﻫﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺿﺭ ﺑﺭ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ‪ :‬ﻫﻣﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ ﺑﺟﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺱ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻧﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ‬
‫‪46‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻳﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻧﻳﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺭﻭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ‪ LG‬ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺭﻣﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺗﯽ ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﺻﺏ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻧﺻﺏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺳﺗﻳﺩ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﻳﺎﻧﺑﺭ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﮐﺎﻫﺵ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ )‪ (-‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺩﺕ ﺣﺩﺍﻗﻝ ﺩﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﮑﺱ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ‪ Screenshots‬ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﻟﺭی‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻋﮑﺱ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ‪+‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻣﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺷﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﻳﺵ‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ )‪ ،(+‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺱ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ‪ +‬ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻣﻳﺎﻧﺑﺭ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻭﺷﺗﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺱ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺗﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺗﻥ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﻳپ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺗﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻣﻌﻣﻭﻟﯽ ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺗﯽ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺎﻳپ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺧﻁﺎﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻳﺩﺍ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﮑﺎﻥﻧﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﻝ ﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺎﻳپ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺗﻥ‪ ،‬ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ؛ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼپ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻥ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ‪QWERTY‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪48‬‬
‫ﭘﻳﺷﻧﻬﺎﺩ ﮐﻠﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ‪ Smart‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﮕﻭﻫﺎی ﻣﺻﺭﻓﯽ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺟﺯﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻧﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﻳپ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﭘﻳﺷﻧﻬﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺭﭼﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﻳﺷﻧﻬﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﺗﺭ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻣﻪ ﭘﻳﺷﻧﻬﺎﺩی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﺳﻣﺕ ﭼپ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﮐﻠﻣﻪ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﯽ ﻫﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺭﻭﻑ ﮐﻠﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳپ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﭼﻳﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ‪QWERTY‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻠﻳﺩﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺭﺩﻳﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻧﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ‪LG‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﭼﻳﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ‪ QWERTY‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ .‬ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ‬
‫ﭼﻳﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ‪ QWERTY‬ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﻳﺩی ﺩﺭ ﺭﺩﻳﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﻠﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻥ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩﻫﺎی ‪ QWERTY ،QWERTZ‬ﻭ ‪ AZERTY‬ﻗﺎﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻁﻭﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺎﻳپ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ‪LG‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻁﻭﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻳﻥ ﭼﻧﺩ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ‪LG‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻳﻣﻪ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻫﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻳﻣﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻣﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ‪ LG‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺟﺩﺍ ﺍﺯﻫﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺟﺩﺍ ﺍﺯﻫﻡ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺑﭼﺭﺧﺎﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی‬
‫ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺎﻧﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻡ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮏ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻫﻡ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺗﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﯽ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻣﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ‪LG‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﯽ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻓﻠﺵ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻧﺎﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺕ‬
‫ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪51‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺗﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺩﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﻓﺭﻣﺎﻥ ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺭﻳﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺑﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻭﺿﻭﺡ‬
‫ﺻﺣﺑﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺗﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺻﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺻﺩﺍ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ‬
‫• ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺷﻭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻁﻘﻪ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ ﺩﻫﯽ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﺯﺑﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺯﺑﺎﻥﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ‪LG‬‬
‫ﮐﭘﯽ ﻭ ﺟﺎی ﮔﺫﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﺗﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺭﺵ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﻭ ﮐﭘﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺗﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺫﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺭﺍ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺗﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺫﺍﺭی‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﻣﺗﻥ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﭘﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺭﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺣﻝ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﭘﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺷﺧﺹ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺵ ﻳﺎ ﮐﭘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺗﻥ ﺑﺭﺵ ﺧﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﮐﭘﯽ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻠﻳپ ﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻣﺗﻥ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﭼﺳﺑﺎﻧﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﻫﻳﭻ ﻣﻭﺭﺩی ﮐﭘﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺭﻳﺩﻩ ﻧﺷﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﭼﺳﺑﺎﻧﺩﻥ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪52‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻳپ ﺑﻭﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺗﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﭘﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺭﺵ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺿﺎی ﮐﻠﻳپ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺭ ﻓﺿﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﺎی ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻣﺗﻥ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﮐﻠﻳپ‬
‫ﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻳﻧﯽ ﮐﻠﻳپ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺟﺎی ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺩﺍﮐﺛﺭ ‪ 20‬ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺿﺎی ﮐﻠﻳپ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺗﯽ ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺩﺍﮐﺛﺭ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺟﺎﺯ ﻓﺭﺍﺗﺭ ﺭﻓﺗﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻧﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺍﮐﺛﺭ ﺩﻩ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺗﺩﺍ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺿﺎی ﮐﻠﻳپ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻠﻳپﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍ‬
‫ﭘﺧﺵ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻋﮑﺱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮔﺎﻟﺭی ﻳﺎ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺧﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ‪ ،Chromecast‬ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱﻫﺎی ‪ Google Play‬ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺑﻪﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪53‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮑﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﺎﻟﺭی ﻳﺎ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ NAS ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻫﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ‪ DLNA‬ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻳﻡ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﯽ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺗﻣﺎ ً ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻝ )‪ (DLNA‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺑﺩﺃ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮑﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ DLNA‬ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻳﮑﺳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎی ﻣﺟﺎﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮑﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺭﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ‪ LG‬ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺑﻠﺕ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮔﺎﻟﺭی‪ ,‬ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ؛ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻋﮑﺱ‬
‫ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻋﮑﺱ‬
‫‪SmartShare Beam‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪54‬‬
‫• ﺣﺗﻣﺎ ً ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻳﻣﯽ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺑﺩﺃ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺻﺩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺯﺍﺣﻡ ﻧﺷﻭﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻳﺻﺩﺍ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻳﮏ ﻣﺩﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻣﺯﺍﺣﻣﺗﯽ ﺑﺭﺍﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻧﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﺩﺍ ﻭ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﺩﺍ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻟﺭﺯﺵ ﻫﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﻭﻟﻭﻳﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻟﺭﺯﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺑﯽ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺗﯽ ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﻭﻟﻭﻳﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ ﻫﻣﭼﻧﺎﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﮑﻭﺕ ﻣﻁﻠﻕ‪ :‬ﺻﺩﺍ ﻭ ﻟﺭﺯﺵ ﻫﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺯﺍﺣﻡ ﻧﺷﻭﻳﺩ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪55‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻧﺻﺏ ﻭ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺻﺏ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﻭ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺭﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ‪ SmartWorld‬ﻭ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Play‬ﻳﺎ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﭘﻭﻟﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻁﺭﺡ ﻗﻳﻣﺕ ﮔﺫﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﺻﺭﻓﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺭﺩﺍﺧﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺣﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺳﺗﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‬
‫‪ SmartWorld‬ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻥ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﭘﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻟﻐﻭ ﻧﺻﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ؛ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺣﺫﻑ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺟﺕ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺩﺕ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻟﺣﻅﻪ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﺻﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻧﻭی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﻟﻐﻭ ﻧﺻﺏ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺭﻭﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭘﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭﺍﻥ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺩﺕ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﺻﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻧﺻﺏ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‪ :‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﺻﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺋﻣﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫• ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺷﺩﻧﺷﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻳﺯ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﻧﺻﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﭘﻳﺵ ﻓﺭﺽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ‪ EasyHome‬ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻭﺭﺍً ﻭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺋﻣﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫‪58‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺻﻭﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺗﻠﻔﻧﯽ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻼً ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺍﺧﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﮏ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﻭی ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺏ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺏ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ”‪ “+‬ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ‪ 0‬ﺿﺭﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﺣﻭﻩ ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی‬
‫ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪59‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﺳﺧﮕﻭﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻳﺭﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﺎﺳﺧﮕﻭﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‪،‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﻫﺩﺳﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻣﺷﺗﺭک ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ؛‬
‫ﺳﭘﺱ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‪،‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﻳﺵ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ )‪ ،(+‬ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﮐﺎﻫﺵ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ )‪ (-‬ﻳﺎ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻥ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻳﺎ ﻟﺭﺯﺵ ﻏﻳﺭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ ﺑﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﺳﺧﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻣﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮔﺯﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‪ :‬ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻧﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻠﻧﺩﮔﻭ‪ :‬ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺑﻠﻧﺩﮔﻭی ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﯽ ﺻﺩﺍ‪ :‬ﺻﺩﺍﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻁﻊ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻁﺭﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﺻﺩﺍﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :Bluetooth‬ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪﻫﺎی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺳﻪ ﻁﺭﻓﻪ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺏ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻧﻳﺯ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی‬
‫• ﻫﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻳﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﮐﻧﻔﺭﺍﻧﺳﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻫﺭ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺭﺍﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻅﺭ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﺳﻭﺍﺑﻕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‬
‫ﮔﺯﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ .‬ﺳﭘﺱ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﺳﻭﺍﺑﻕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﺳﻭﺍﺑﻕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺏ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺳﻭﺍﺑﻕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫• ﻣﺩﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی‬
‫ﮐﺳﺏ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﻫﻣﻪ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی ﻳﺎ ﮔﺯﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫ﭘﻳﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﭘﻳﺎﻡﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﭘﻳﺎﻡﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺷﻭﺭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺳﺏ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮔﻳﺭﻧﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺧﺹ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﻳﻭﺳﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻧﻭی ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭی‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻭﺍﻧﺩﻥ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺩﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺏ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺭﺷﺗﻪ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪63‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻟﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﺎﻧﺩﻧﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻅ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻟﻧﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻗﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺭ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﻳﺎء ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻟﻧﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﻟﮑﻪ ﻧﻳﻔﺗﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﮐﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﺯ ‪ 5%‬ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺻﺎﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻓﺭﻕ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﮑﺱﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﻟﺭی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﮔﺎﻟﺭی ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺎﻟﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺩﻳﻭﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﺑﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺭﮔﺭﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻠﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭ ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻘﺏ ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻭﻩ ﻓﻳﻠﺗﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺳﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺭﻭی ﺳﻭژﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻓﻭﮐﻭﺱ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﻋﮑﺳﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﻭی‬
‫• ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﻋﮑﺱ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﻳﺵ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ )‪ (+‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺵ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ )‪ (-‬ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫‪64‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺷﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﮐﺎﻫﺵ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺻﺩﺍ )‪ ،(-‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺭ ﺍ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻣﻳﺎﻧﺑﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻳﻠﻣﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺭﻭی ﺳﻭژﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻓﻭﮐﻭﺱ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﻋﮑﺳﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﻓﻳﻠﻣﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻳﻠﻣﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻳﻠﻣﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺧﺻﯽﺳﺎﺯی ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﭼﻧﺩﻳﻥ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫• ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺑﯽ )ﺟﻠﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻘﺏ( ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻧﺳﺑﺕ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﮑﺱﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﻭﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯﻩ ﻭﻳﺩﻳﻭﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDR‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺳﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎی ﺯﻧﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻭﻫﻬﺎی ﺑﻳﻧﻅﻳﺭی‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺣﺗﯽ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﻧﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻳﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﻓﻥ ﺁﻭﺭی ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﻩ ﭘﻭﻳﺎی ﺯﻳﺎﺩ )‪(HDR‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻣﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺩﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Cheese Shutter‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺭﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺩﺍﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭی ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﻓﻳﻠﻣﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﻪ ﺣﺩﺍﻗﻝ ﺑﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫‪65‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻝ ﺑﺭﭼﺳﺏ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎی ‪ GPS‬ﻣﺣﻝ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺍی‬
‫ﺷﺑﮑﻪﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺭ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻣﻭﺩی ﻋﮑﺱ ﻭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ‪ SD‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻫﻣﻪ ﻣﻧﻭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﺧﻔﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﻫﺭﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻧﻭﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺱ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﮑﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺩﺳﺕ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺗﯽ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺩﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﮑﺳﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﭼﻬﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺷﻧﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻋﮑﺱ ﭼﺭﺧﻳﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﺳﻠﻔﯽﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺑﺭﮔﺭﺩﺍﻥ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪66‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺕﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﻧﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻬﺕ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻋﮑﺳﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﮑﺱﻫﺎی ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻟﯽ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻳﮑﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻣﺎی ﻋﺭﻳﺽ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻋﮑﺱ ﭘﺎﻧﻭﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭی ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻫﺳﺗﮕﯽ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻬﺕ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺩﻧﺑﺎﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺟﻬﺕ ﭘﻳﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﮑﺳﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﭘﺎﻧﻭﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﻋﮑﺱ ﭼﻧﺩﺗﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻟﯽ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺗﺣﺭک ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺍﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺻﺎﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻟﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺭﻋﺗﯽ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺩﺍﮐﺛﺭ ﺳﯽ )‪ (30‬ﻋﮑﺱ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻟﯽ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫‪67‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻧﻭﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﺧﻔﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻣﻧﻭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪AE/AF lock‬‬
‫ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻧﻭﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﻓﻭﮐﻭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺷﺗﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﻧﻘﻁﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥﻫﺎی ﺟﻠﻭ ﻭ ﻋﻘﺏ ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺭ ﺟﻬﺗﯽ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺟﻠﻭ ﻭ ﻋﻘﺏ ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺱ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ ﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫‪68‬‬
‫ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻧﻔﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﻓﻳﻠﻣﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﯽ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻭ ﻣﻧﻔﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻡ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮏ‬
‫ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻡ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ؛ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﻐﺯﺍﻥ ‪ -/+‬ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺯﻭﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺱ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﭼﻬﺭﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺩﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻑ ﺩﺳﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺑﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺩﺳﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﺷﺕ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻧﺩﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻣﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﻋﮑﺱ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻋﮑﺱ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺩﺳﺕ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻑ ﺩﺳﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺧﻁ ﺻﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺩﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺱ ﻧﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫‪69‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺳﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﭼﻬﺭﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭ ﭼﻬﺭﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ‬
‫ﺩﻫﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﺽ ﺷﻧﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﭼﻬﺭﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﺳﻔﻳﺩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻅﺎﻫﺭ‬
‫ﻣﯽﮔﺭﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺳﻭژﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﻳﺳﺗﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺑﯽ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ؛ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻣﯽﮔﻳﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺱ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺳﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻋﮑﺳﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﻳﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻑ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺑﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺭﻋﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ً ﺩﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺳﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﻪﺍی‪ ،‬ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻋﮑﺱ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ‬
‫ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫‪70‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻓﻭﺭﺍً ﺑﺎ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺗﺗﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﭘﻳﺵ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺳﻠﻔﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻧﻣﺎی ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻳﺵ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﭘﻳﺵ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺑﭼﺭﺧﺎﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻋﮑﺱ ﭼﺭﺧﻳﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﯽﺁﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻋﮑﺱ ﭼﺭﺧﻳﺩﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻧﺣﻭﻩ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺷﺩﻥ ﺳﻠﻔﯽﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺧﺻﯽﺳﺎﺯی ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪﻫﺎی ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫‪71‬‬
‫ﮔﺎﻟﺭی‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﮔﺎﻟﺭی‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫• ﻋﮑﺱﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺭ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻗﺑﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺩی‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭼپ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺟﻠﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻘﺏ ﺑﺭﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼپ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﻧﺻﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺭﻣﺕ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻧﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻁﺭ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺩ ﻣﺟﺎﺯ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺧﻁﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﺑﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺭﮔﺭﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺭﮔﺯﻳﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺧﻭﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭی‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺎﻭﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺎﻭﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک‬
‫ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺎﻭﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻧﻭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﻼﻳﻣﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺧﻔﯽ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻧﻭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺟﺩﺩﺍً ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫‪72‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺯ ﭼﻧﺩﻳﻥ ﺟﻠﻭﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺯﺍﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﻋﮑﺱ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﻭﻧﻭﻳﺳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺭﻭﻧﻭﺷﺕ‬
‫ﭘﺧﺵ ﻭﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺭﮔﺯﻳﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺣﺫﻑ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻭﻗﺗﺎ ً‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭی‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪QSlide.‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻣﺕ ﺭﺍﺳﺕ ﻭﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻧﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻣﺕ ﭼپ ﻭﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫‪73‬‬
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻌﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﻣﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﻧﺩ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ‪ 7‬ﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﻟﺭی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﻟﺭی‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻧﺧﻭﺍﻫﻧﺩ ﺑﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻫﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ‬
‫ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻫﺗﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫‪74‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺁﻫﻧﮓﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻟﺑﻭﻡﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪LG‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﻪ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺷﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﭘﺧﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﺑﻠﯽ ﺑﺭﮔﺭﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺫﻑ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺗﮑﺭﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻠﻭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﺧﺵ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﺩی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ‪/‬‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻭ ﺑﺭﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﺗﺎ ً ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭی ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﺧﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺗﺩﺍی ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ‪ /‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻗﺑﻠﯽ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺷﻭﺩ ‪ /‬ﺑﺭﺍی‬
‫ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪،‬ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﻧﺻﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺭﻣﺕ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻧﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺩ ﻣﺟﺎﺯ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺧﻁﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﺣﻕ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻟﮑﻳﻥ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﮐﭘﯽ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻧﯽ ﮐﺳﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﮐﭘﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺗﺩﺍ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻥ ﺣﻕ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺷﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁﻪ ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺩﻝ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺻﺩﺍی ‪ Hi-Fi‬ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭ ﺭﻭی ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ‬
‫‪ ،Hi-Fi‬ﻧﻣﺎﺩ ‪ Hi-Fi‬ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫‪75‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺛﺑﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻁﺭﺡ ﻗﻳﻣﺕ ﮔﺫﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﺻﺭﻓﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺭﺩﺍﺧﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺳﺏ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺑﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻠﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺛﺑﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﻭ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻋﺑﻭﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺑﻌﺩی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺳﺎﺑﺗﺎﻥ ﺛﺑﺕ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺛﺑﺕ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺩﺳﺗﯽ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺣﺫﻑ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﭼﻧﺩﻳﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺛﺑﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺩﻳﮕﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺩﻳﮕﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫‪76‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﭘﺳﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻉ ﻭ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﻳﻭﺳﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻧﻭی ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭی‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺣﺎﻭی ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ﺍی‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻟﻳﺳﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫‪77‬‬
‫ﻫﻣﮕﺎﻣﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ‪ Google‬ﻧﻳﺯ ﻫﻣﮕﺎﻣﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﭘﺱ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ‪ Google‬ﻫﻣﮕﺎﻣﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻝ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺣﻝ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺣﻝ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺧﯽ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺻﺎﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺗﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻭﻗﺗﺎ ً ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩﺍﻧﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ‬
‫•‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﺗﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک‬
‫ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﮐﺕ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩ ﺭﻭی ﭘﺎﮐﺕ‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻭﻗﺗﺎ ً ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﮐﺕ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻳﭻ ﻣﻭﻋﺩ ﻣﻘﺭﺭی ﻧﺩﺍﺭﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻳﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﺎﺷﻳﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ :‬ﻣﺎﺷﻳﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻣﯽ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻳﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﻣﺣﺎﺳﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﺷﻳﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺳﯽ‪ ،‬ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﻐﺯﺍﻥ ﺳﺑﺯ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻣﺕ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻣﺕ ﭼپ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﺣﺎﺳﺑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫‪78‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺕ‬
‫ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺕ‬
‫ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﻗﺑﻼً ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺣﺫﻑ ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻬﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺷﻬﺭ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻣﺭ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﻣﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺩﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻣﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﮑﺙ ﺗﺎﻳﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻣﮑﺙ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺯ ﺳﺭ ﮔﻳﺭی ﺗﺎﻳﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺍﺯﺳﺭﮔﻳﺭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﻳﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺎﻳﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫‪79‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﺳﻧﺞ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺭﻭﻧﻭﻣﺗﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺛﺑﺕ ﻣﺩﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﭘﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺕ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﺳﻧﺞ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﺭﻭﻧﻭﻣﺗﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺛﺑﺕ ﻣﺩﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﭘﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺩﻭﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﺳﻧﺞ ﻣﻭﻗﺗﺎ ً ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻣﮑﺙ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺯ ﺳﺭ ﮔﻳﺭی ﮐﺭﻭﻧﻭﻣﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺍﺯﺳﺭﮔﻳﺭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﺎک ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻫﻣﻪ ﺳﻭﺍﺑﻕ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﻣﺟﺩﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﺳﻧﺞ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻳﺭی ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺫﻑ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺍﺑﺯﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻳﺭی ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺿﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺍﺑﺯﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺣﻝ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫‪80‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺻﺩﺍﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎی ﻣﻬﻡ ﺛﺑﺕ ﻭ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺍﺑﺯﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻳﺕ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﻫﻣﮕﺎﻡﺳﺎﺯی ﻭ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﺩﺕ ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺭﺩﻩﺍﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺭﻭﻳﺩﺍﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻳﻠﻣﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﻭی‬
‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ”ﺷﻧﻳﺩﻥ ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻪ“ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﺧﺵ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺿﺑﻁ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﻭی‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻑ ﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ ‪ FM‬ﮔﻭﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺯﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻑ ﺍﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺗﺩﺍ ﻳﮏ ﻫﺩﺳﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺩﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻧﺗﻥ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺳﺗﻳﺩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫‪81‬‬
‫‪LG Health‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ‪LG Health‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﻳﮕﻳﺭی ﻭﺭﺯﺵ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺳﻼﻣﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﻭﺭﺯﺷﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻅ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪LG Health‬‬
‫ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ‪LG Health‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪LG Health‬‬
‫‪ LG‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﮑﻣﻳﻝ ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺑﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪LG Health‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪ LG Health‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻭﺭﺯﺵ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻧﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺳﻼﻣﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪LG Health‬‬
‫‪ LG‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫‪82‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﮔﺯﺍﺭﺵ ﻭﺭﺯﺷﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫‪ :‬ﭘﻳﮕﻳﺭی ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻳﺕ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺭﺯﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺳﻳﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻳﺕ ﻓﻳﺯﻳﮑﯽ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﻫﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻭﺭﺯﺵ ﺛﺑﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻭﺭﺯﺷﯽ ﺭﻭﺯﺍﻧﻪ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻣﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻟﺭی ﻭ ﮔﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺭ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ‪ LG Health‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻼﻣﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ‪ LG Health‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺭﺍﺣﺗﯽ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﻳﺷﮕﻳﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻳﻣﺎﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻣﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻳﻣﺎﺭی ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﭘﺯﺷﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺷﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ‪ LG Health‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﮐﻧﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺻﻼً‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﻧﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺷﻭﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ‪LG‬‬
‫‪ Health‬ﮐﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ‪LG Health‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﺍﻣﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻁﺭ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺭﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ LG‬ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺑﺩﺃ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺻﺩ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺗﺎﺋﻳﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫‪83‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺏ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭی ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﯽ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺣﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻧﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺏ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺳﺗﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ؛ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺏ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﺎ ً ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻳﺭﻧﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪84‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮔﺭﻭﻩ‬
‫ﮔﺭﻭﻩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﻭی ﮔﺭﻭﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻳﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺭﻭﻩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺭﻭی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﻋﺿﻭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮔﺭﻭﻩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﻳﻑ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺛﺑﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪LG‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﻳﻑ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪LG Backup‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ‪ LG Backup‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﮔﻳﺭی ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ ‪ LG Backup‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﻪ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﮐﭘﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺑﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎی ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺣﻝ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺩﺍﻗﻝ ﺑﺭﺳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻬﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ‪ LG‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺿﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺣﻝ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﮐﭘﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫‪85‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻧﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ ،Google‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ ،Google‬ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ،Google‬ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ‪،Google‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ‪ Google‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻣﮕﺎﻣﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻫﺎ ‪ Play‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Drive‬ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺳﻭﻧﺩ ‪ *.ibf‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ‪ LG‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺣﻝ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻬﻳﻪ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻧﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪RemoteCall Service‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﺷﮑﻼﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻧﺎﺳﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﻁﺭﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺗﺩﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺭﮐﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺷﺗﺭی ‪ LG‬ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺗﺩﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻁﺭﺡ ﻗﻳﻣﺕ ﮔﺫﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﺻﺭﻓﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺭﺩﺍﺧﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪ RemoteCall Service‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺭﮐﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺷﺗﺭی ‪ LG‬ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺑﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺷﺵ ﺭﻗﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭﺻﻝ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Chrome‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ‪ Chrome‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺏ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺑﻭک ﻣﺎﺭک ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﻭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫‪86‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎی ‪Google‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ Google‬ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺛﺑﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Google‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻧﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﺣﻭﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻧﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻧﺩﻧﮕﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻧﺎﺩی ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﻧﺎﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺁﻧﻼﻳﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﻧﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮑﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Drive‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺁﭘﻠﻭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺩﻫﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺭ‬
‫ﮐﺟﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺱ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻼً ﺍﺯ ﻣﺣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﻼﻳﻥ ﻭ ﺁﻓﻼﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪Gmail‬‬
‫ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ‪ Gmail‬ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺛﺑﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Google‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ ،Google‬ﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﺻﺎﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺑﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺑﺳﻳﺎﺭی ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﮐﻠﻳﺩی ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﮔﻔﺗﺎﺭی ﻳﺎ ﻧﻭﺷﺗﺎﺭی ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Maps‬‬
‫ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺣﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻘﺷﻪ ﭘﻳﺩﺍ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﮑﺱ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺱ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫‪87‬‬
‫ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ‪Play‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺭﺍﻳﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺭﻳﺩ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺭﻳﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺭ ﮐﺟﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ‪Play‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Play‬ﺧﺭﻳﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭگ ﻧﮕﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮔﺳﺗﺭﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮔﺳﺗﺭﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺁﻧﻼﻳﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮔﺳﺗﺭﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک‬
‫ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮑﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺩﻧﮕﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺁﻧﻼﻳﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮑﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪YouTube‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺩﻳﻭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺩﻳﻭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪ YouTube‬ﺁﭘﻠﻭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺭﺍﺩی ﺩﺭ ﺳﺭﺗﺎﺳﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻔﻳﺩ‬
‫‪88‬‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫• ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻧﻁﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻣﺎی ﺑﺭﮔﻪ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻭﺗﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﻡ ‪ :1‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻧﻣﺎﺩ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ 1‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﻡ ‪ :2‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻧﻣﺎﺩ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‪ :‬ﻁﺭﺡ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺻﺭﻓﻪ ﺟﻭﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺻﺭﻓﻪ ﺟﻭﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺭژی ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻳﺭﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺻﺭﻓﻪ ﺟﻭﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺭژی‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﯽ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻳﻡ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺍﺧﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﺣﺗﯽ ﺍﮔﺭ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻼ ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻳﺗﺎی ﻣﻭﺑﺎﻳﻝ‪ :‬ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻳﺯ ﻏﻳﺭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﻭﻣﻳﻧﮓ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺭﻭﻣﻳﻧﮓ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻁﻘﻪ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻫﺳﺗﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪90‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮑﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫• ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﮐﻪ ﻗﺑﻼً ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺭﺣﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﺭﺍﺭ ﻧﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺭﻭی ﻓﺭﺍﻣﻭﺵ‬
‫ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻧﺗﻭﺍﻧﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪91‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi Direct‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪Wi-Fi Direct‬‬
‫ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﻳﺎﺯی ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻁﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﻧﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Wi-Fi Direct‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ Wi-Fi Direct Wi-Fi‬ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮑﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ‪ Wi-Fi Direct‬ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻧﺩ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭﺧﻭﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭘﺫﻳﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻳﺷﺭﻓﺗﻪ ‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ‪ Wi-Fi Direct‬ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺳﺭﻳﻌﺗﺭ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪92‬‬
‫‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮑﯽ ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺩﺳﺕ‬
‫ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﺗﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺷﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﻧﻭﺳﺎﺯی ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻘﻁ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺭﺅﻳﺕ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺷﺩﻩﺍﻧﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﺄﻳﻳﺩ ﺍﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺑﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺭﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺑﻼً ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺍﻧﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ ﭼﻧﺩﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﺽ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭘﺫﻳﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪93‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺗﺎی ﻣﻭﺑﺎﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻳﺭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺗﺎی ﻣﻭﺑﺎﻳﻝ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺗﺎی ﻣﻭﺑﺎﻳﻝ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻳﺗﺎی ﻣﻭﺑﺎﻳﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻭﺑﺎﻳﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﻳﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﮔﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﻳﺕ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺳﻳﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﺳﺩﻭﺩ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﻭ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻠﯽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻫﺎ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻧﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪94‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫‪NFC‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻝ ﺣﻣﻝ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭی‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﻧﻳﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺭی ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ NFC‬ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک‬
‫ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﺟﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ NFC‬ﺿﺭﺑﻪ‬
‫• ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻣﺣﻝ ﻗﺭﺍﺭﮔﻳﺭی ﺁﻧﺗﻥ ‪ NFC‬ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی‬
‫ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺁﻧﺗﻥ ‪ ،NFC‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﻗﻁﻌﺎﺕ ﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Android Beam‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﭘﺷﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک‬
‫ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻣﻠﻪ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻭﺏ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ Android Beam‬ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﭘﺷﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫• ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻣﺣﻝ ﻗﺭﺍﺭﮔﻳﺭی ﺁﻧﺗﻥ ‪ NFC‬ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪95‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻋﮑﺱ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺑﻠﺕ ﻫﺎی ‪ LG‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻋﮑﺱ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ‪ :LG X venture‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺩﺭ‪ :‬ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﻣﻘﺻﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻋﮑﺱ‪ :‬ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :SmartShare Beam‬ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ‪ SmartShare Beam‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ‪ :‬ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍکﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻝﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺳﺭﻭﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮑﻳﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ‪ DLNA‬ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻧﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍکﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍ‪ :‬ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮑﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :LG X venture‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی‪ :‬ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍی ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎی ﻣﺟﺎﺯ‪ :‬ﻟﻳﺳﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺟﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺩ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎی ﻏﻳﺭﻣﺟﺎﺯ‪ :‬ﻟﻳﺳﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺟﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ‬
‫ﻧﺩﺍﺭﻧﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻭﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫‪96‬‬
‫‪LG AirDrive‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ LG‬ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﻳﺎﺯی ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻧﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ LG‬ﺗﮑﯽ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ‪ LG Bridge‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫‪ LG AirDrive‬ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ‪ LG Bridge‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ‪ www.lg.com‬ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫‪LG AirDrive‬‬
‫ﭼﺎپ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺭ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻋﮑﺱ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻧﺎﺩ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺭ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻭﺭ ﭼﺎﭘﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﺻﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺭ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭی ﻧﺎﻡ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺭ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی‬
‫• ﺳﻧﺩ ﭼﺎپ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺎپ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻧﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪97‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺗﺗﺭﻳﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺳﺎﺭ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺗﺗﺭﻳﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭘﺱ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺳﺎﺭ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ‪ USB‬ﺿﺭﺑﻪ‬
‫• ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻁﺭﺡ ﻗﻳﻣﺕ ﮔﺫﺍﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺕ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺳﺏ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻭﺭ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺕ ‪ www.lg.com‬ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻧﺻﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻭ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻧﺩ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺗﻧﺩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Windows XP‬ﻳﺎ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺭ ﻳﺎ ‪.Linux‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪98‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭘﺎﺕ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻳﻡ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻧﺩ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﭘﺎﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺿﺭﺑﻪ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺗﺗﺭﻳﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭘﺱ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺷﻧﺎﺳﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻳﻡ‬
‫)‪ (SSID‬ﻭ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻁﺭﺡ ﻗﻳﻣﺕ ﮔﺫﺍﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺕ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺳﺏ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻭﺭﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪http://www.android.com/tether#wifi‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪99‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﺭﻳﻧﮓ ﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺷﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺗﺗﺭﻳﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭘﺱ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﺭﻳﻧﮓ ﺑﻠﻭﺗﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺷﺩ‬
‫• ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻁﺭﺡ ﻗﻳﻣﺕ ﮔﺫﺍﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺕ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺳﺏ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻭﺭﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪http://www.android.com/tether#Bluetooth_tethering‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺗﺗﺭﻳﻧﮓ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻫﻭﺍﭘﻳﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻳﺭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﻗﺩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺑﺎﺯی ﻭ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﻫﻣﭼﻧﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻧﺩ ﺑﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻫﻭﺍﭘﻳﻣﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﺄﻳﻳﺩ ﺭﻭی ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‪ :‬ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻧﻘﻁﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﭘﺭﺍﺗﻭﺭﻫﺎی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﭘﺭﺍﺗﻭﺭﻫﺎی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪VPN‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻣﺟﺎﺯی ﺍﻣﻥ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ ﻣﺛﻝ ‪ .Intranet‬ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﻣﺟﺎﺯی ﺧﺻﻭﺻﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ‪VPN‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ‬
‫‪ VPN‬ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻣﻪ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺳﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻬﻡ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺎک ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ‪ VPN‬ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪101‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﻗﻔﻝ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻏﻳﺭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ‪ VPN‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ‪VPN‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ VPN‬ﺭﻭی ‪ VPN‬ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭی ‪ VPN‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺩﺭ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺩﺍ ﻭ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﻭ ﻟﺭﺯﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺻﺩﺍ ﻭ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻣﺷﺧﺻﻪ ﺻﺩﺍ‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﺭﺯﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﯽ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ‪ :‬ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﻡ‪ 1‬ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ‪ /‬ﺳﻳﻡ‪ 2‬ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ‪ :‬ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺯﻧﮕﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺷﺧﺻﻪ ﺯﻧﮓ‪ :‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺍﺯ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﯽ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﺩﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﻟﺭﺯﺵ‪ :‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻠﺭﺯﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ ﭘﺧﺵ‬
‫ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻳﻡ‪ 1‬ﻧﻭﻉ ﻟﺭﺯﺵ ‪ /‬ﺳﻳﻡ‪ 2‬ﻧﻭﻉ ﻟﺭﺯﺵ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻟﺭﺯﺵ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﮕﻭی ﻟﺭﺯﺵ ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺯﺍﺣﻡ ﻧﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪ :‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻔﺗﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪ :‬ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻧﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﺻﻭﺻﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻳﺯ ﭘﻧﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻧﺩ ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻋﻼﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﻫﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﺍ ﻭﻟﻭﻳﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻥ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻋﻼﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪102‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪ LED‬ﺍﻋﻼﻥ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ‪ LED‬ﻣﺷﺧﺹ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺳﻳﻡ‪ 1‬ﺻﺩﺍی ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ‪ /‬ﺳﻳﻡ‪ 2‬ﺻﺩﺍی ﺍﻋﻼﻥ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺟﻠﻭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻭﺗﯽ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻭﻩ ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩﮔﻳﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﻣﯽﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﺩﺍ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻳﺎﻡ‪/‬ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺻﻭﺗﯽ‪ :‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‬
‫ﮔﻳﺭﻧﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍی ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺑﺧﻭﺍﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻫﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ :‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﻬﺎی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪ :‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺿﻣﻭﻥ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻭﻉ ﻓﻭﻧﺕ‪ :‬ﻧﻭﻉ ﻓﻭﻧﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯﻩ ﻗﻠﻡ‪ ::‬ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻭﻧﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺗﻥ ﭘﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ :‬ﻣﺗﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺭﺭﻧﮓ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﻭﺷﻧﺎﻳﯽ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻧﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻧﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺩﺕ ﻧﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺷﻭﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻧﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺩﺕ ﻧﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻣﺎی ﺭﺍﺣﺕ‪ :‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﻭﺭ ﺁﺑﯽ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﺎﻫﺵ ﻳﺎﺑﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭼﺷﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﻧﺭﺳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﭼﺭﺧﺷﯽ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﭼﺭﺧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻭﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺩﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯﻩ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺷﮕﺭ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻭﭼﮏﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪103‬‬
‫• ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ :‬ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻣﺗﺣﺭک‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻧﺩﻩ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﮏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﮐﺎﻟﻳﺑﺭﺍﺳﻳﻭﻥ ﺳﻧﺳﻭﺭ ﺣﺭﮐﺗﯽ‪ :‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺳﺭﻋﺕ ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﺣﺭﮐﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻗﺕ ﮐﺟﯽ ﻭ ﺳﺭﻋﺕ ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﺑﻬﺑﻭﺩ ﭘﻳﺩﺍ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﺣﺭﮐﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻁﺣﯽ ﺻﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﻧﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﺣﺭﮐﺗﯽ ﺧﻁﺎﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ‬
‫ﭼﺭﺧﺵ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﮐﻧﻭﻧﯽ‪ :‬ﻧﻭﻉ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺗﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ‪ :LG‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ‪ LG‬ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺎﻳپ ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ‪ :Google‬ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻣﻼی ﻣﺗﻥ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ‪ Google‬ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺧﺭﻭﺟﻲ ﻣﺗﻥ‪-‬ﺑﻪ‪-‬ﮔﻔﺗﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺧﺭﻭﺟﯽ ﻣﺗﻥ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻔﺗﺎﺭ ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺭﻋﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻣﺎ‪ :‬ﺳﺭﻋﺕ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺭ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺩﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻌﮑﻭﺱ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﺳﻣﺕ ﺭﺍﺳﺕ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﮑﻭﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻗﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﯽ ﻭ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪104‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻳﺕ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻧﺣﻭﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻳﺕ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﻠﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭﺧﻭﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﺧﻳﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺧﻳﺭﺍً ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﻭﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺧﻣﻳﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻳﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻳﺭﻭی ﮐﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﺣﻝ ﺗﺧﻣﻳﻧﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ ﮐﻡ ﺍﻧﺭژی‬
‫ﻣﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺎﺑﻘﻪ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ‪ :Google‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﻪ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ‪ Google‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﻳﮑﺭﺑﻧﺩی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﻭﻫﻣﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻣﻠﻪ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪.Google‬‬
‫ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻣﮕﺎﻣﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﻭﻫﻣﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻫﻣﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪ :‬ﻫﻣﻪ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻫﺎی ﺛﺑﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻫﻣﮕﺎﻣﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک ﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﻟﻳﺳﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻫﺎی ﺛﺑﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﺍک‪ :‬ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﻓﺯﻭﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﻧﺻﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺩﻳﺩ ‪ :TalkBack‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺻﻭﺗﯽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺍﻗﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻳﺎﻡ‪/‬ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺻﻭﺗﯽ‪ :‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪105‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﮔﻳﺭﻧﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍی ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺑﺧﻭﺍﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯﻩ ﻗﻠﻡ‪ ::‬ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﻭﻧﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺗﻥ ﭘﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ :‬ﻣﺗﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺭﺭﻧﮓ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯﻩ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺷﮕﺭ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻭﭼﮏﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻧﻔﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺩ ﺯﻭﻡ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ‪ :‬ﺑﺧﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﮑﻭﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﺷﺎﻧﮕﺭ ﺑﺯﺭگ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‪ :‬ﻣﮑﺎﻥﻧﻣﺎی ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺯﺭﮔﻧﻣﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ :‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻓﺯﺍﻳﺵ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﺍﺳﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺱﺯﻣﻳﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻌﮑﻭﺱ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ :‬ﮐﻧﺗﺭﺍﺳﺕ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻓﺭﺍﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻳﻧﺎﻳﯽ ﺿﻌﻳﻔﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺯﺍﻳﺵ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ :‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺧﺎﮐﺳﺗﺭی‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺧﺎﮐﺳﺗﺭی ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺩ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺷﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ‪-‬ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ‪/‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺩ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺩ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻧﻭﺍﻳﯽ ﻋﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ‪ :‬ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻭﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺷﮑﻝ ﺷﻧﻭﺍﻳﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ ﺯﻳﺭﻧﻭﻳﺱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻧﻭﺍﻳﯽ ‪ LED‬ﺍﻋﻼﻥ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ‪ LED‬ﻣﺷﺧﺹ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻧﻭﺍﻳﯽ ﺍﺧﻁﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﻓﻼﺵ‪ :‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺷﻣﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻧﻭﺭی ﺑﺭﺍی‬
‫ﺗﻣﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‪ ،‬ﭘﻳﺎﻡﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺩﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻧﻭﺍﻳﯽ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻫﻣﻪ ﺻﺩﺍﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﻫﻣﻪ ﺻﺩﺍﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻁﻊ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺻﺩﺍی ﮔﻳﺭﻧﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺵ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻧﻭﺍﻳﯽ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺻﺩﺍ‪ :‬ﻧﻭﻉ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻧﻭﺍﻳﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ‪ :‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﺭﻭﺟﯽ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺩ ﺑﺭﺍی‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺭﮐﺗﯽ ﻭ ﺷﻧﺎﺧﺗﯽ ‪ :Touch assistant‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻫﺎ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺭ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺭﮐﺗﯽ ﻭ ﺷﻧﺎﺧﺗﯽ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺗﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ؛ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻳﺵ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪106‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺣﺭﮐﺗﯽ ﻭ ﺷﻧﺎﺧﺗﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻛﻠﻳﺩ ﻓﻳﺯﻳﻛﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺭﮐﺗﯽ ﻭ ﺷﻧﺎﺧﺗﯽ ﮐﻠﻳﮏ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﮑﺎﻥﻧﻣﺎی ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‬
‫ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﻧﮑﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻠﻳﮏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺭﮐﺗﯽ ﻭ ﺷﻧﺎﺧﺗﯽ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻣﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺷﺗﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﮐﺷﻳﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﻫﺎ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺭﮐﺗﯽ ﻭ ﺷﻧﺎﺧﺗﯽ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻭﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺩﺕ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺭﮐﺗﯽ ﻭ ﺷﻧﺎﺧﺗﯽ ﻧﻭﺍﺣﯽ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ‪ :‬ﻣﺣﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺧﺵ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﮑﻭﻥ ﻣﻳﺎﻧﺑﺭ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﭘﺭﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﭼﺭﺧﺷﯽ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺕ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻳﺯﻳﮑﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺳﻭﺋﻳﭻ‪ :‬ﺗﺭﮐﻳﺏ ﻫﺎی ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﯽﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻣﻳﺎﻧﺑﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻳﺩﻫﺎی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﻣﻳﺎﻧﺑﺭ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﮑﺱ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ‪ :+‬ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ‪ :‬ﮐﻠﻳﺩ ﺻﺩﺍی ﮐﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪107‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ ‪Google‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ‪ Google‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ Google‬ﻭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ ‪ Google‬ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻧﻳﺕ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻧﻳﺕ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺗﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺍﺛﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﺷﺕ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍ‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﻗﻔﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﻟﺭی ﻳﺎ ‪ QuickMemo+‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ‪ :‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺫﻳﺭ ﻧﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻣﺯﮔﺫﺍﺭی‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﺍﻳﻣﻥ‪ :‬ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﺍﻳﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‪ :‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ USIM‬ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ )ﭘﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺭﻭﻳﺕ ﺑﻭﺩﻥ ﺗﺎﻳپ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ‪ :‬ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻧﺷﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﻳﺭﺍﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺩ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻌﺿﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﺎﺷﻧﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻏﻳﺭ ‪Play Store‬‬
‫ﻧﺻﺏ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ :‬ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﺣﻝ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩﺳﺎﺯی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻭﺍﻫﯽ ﺍﻣﻧﻳﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﻣﺟﻭﺯﻫﺎ‪ :‬ﮔﻭﺍﻫﯽ ﺍﻣﻧﻳﺗﯽ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Trust agents‬ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺻﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭی‪ :‬ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪108‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻓﺿﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻓﺿﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ :‬ﻓﺿﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﻠﯽ ﻭ ﻓﺿﺎی ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺣﻝ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻳﺳﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻅﺭﻓﻳﺕ‬
‫ﻓﺿﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻫﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺣﻣﻝ‪ :‬ﮐﻝ ﻓﺿﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻭ ﻓﺿﺎی ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺟﺩﺍ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﻭ ﺻﺭﻓﻪ ﺟﻭﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ ﺑﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺻﺭﻓﻪ ﺟﻭﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺭژی ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻣﺻﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی‪ :‬ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭﺻﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺩﺭ ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ‪ :‬ﺳﻁﺢ ﺑﺎﻗﻳﻣﺎﻧﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺩﺭﺻﺩی ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﻧﻳﺭﻭ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻡ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻧﺎﻳﯽ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺕ ﻭ ﺷﺩﺕ ﻟﺭﺯﺵ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺻﺭﻑ ﺟﻭﻳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ‬
‫ﺻﺭﻓﻪ ﺟﻭﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻧﺭژی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﻭ ﺻﺭﻓﻪ ﺟﻭﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ ﺑﺭﻕ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ‬
‫‪109‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺩﺕ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻟﻳﺳﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺻﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﺭﺍی ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻗﺩﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻭ ﭘﺭﺩﺍﺧﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﭘﺭﺩﺍﺧﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻭ ﭘﺭﺩﺍﺧﺕ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﮔﻳﺭی ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬
‫ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﮔﻳﺭی ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ‪ :LG Backup‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻓﺭﺳﺗﻧﺩﻩﻫﺎی ﻣﺳﺩﻭﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﭘﻳﺎﻡﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺻﺎﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺭﺩﺍﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ‪ LG Backup‬ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻬﻳﻪ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻥ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻣﺯ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺭﻭﺭ ‪ Google‬ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﮔﻳﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‪ :‬ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺻﺏ ﻣﺟﺩﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ‪ Wi-Fi، Bluetooth :‬ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪110‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‪ :‬ﻫﻣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﭘﺎک ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ Google‬ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺟﺩﺩﺍً ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﻧﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻗﯽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻣﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻋﻼﺋﻡ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻧﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻣﻧﯽ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪111‬‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ‪LG‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﮐﻠﻳﺩ‬
‫• ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺱ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ؛ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻی ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫‬‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﭘﻳﺵﻓﺭﺽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮔﺭﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫‪LG Bridge‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﻠﯽ ‪LG Bridge‬‬
‫‪ LG Bridge‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﮐﻣﮏ ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ ﻋﮑﺱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻧﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ ‪ LG‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺑﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺱ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ‪ LG Bridge‬ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﮐﻧﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ ‪ LG‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻭﺭ ‪ USB LG‬ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺻﺏ ‪ ،LG Bridge‬ﻧﺻﺏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ‪LG Bridge‬‬
‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺩﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ‬
‫‪ ،USB‬ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﯽ‬
‫‪113‬‬
‫ﻧﺻﺏ ‪ LG Bridge‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭘﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﻪ ‪ www.lg.com‬ﺑﺭﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻧﻁﻘﻪ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺭﻭی ‪) Support‬ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ( ‪) Software & Firmware‬ﻧﺭﻡﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻳﺎﻥﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ( ﮐﻠﻳﮏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﮔﺭﻭﻩ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ‪) PC Sync‬ﻫﻣﮕﺎﻡﺳﺎﺯی ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ(‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ‪) Details‬ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ( ﺑﺭﻭﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺩﺍﻗﻝ ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻧﺻﺏ ‪LG Bridge‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ LG Bridge‬ﺑﺭﻭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ‪ LG Mobile‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺳﺏ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ً ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ http://www.lg.com/common/index.jsp‬ﺩﻳﺩﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﺷﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺗﯽ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻧﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﺍی ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺗﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺭﮐﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﺩﻳﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ‪ LG‬ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﺩﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﺎﻣﻼً ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ً ﻫﻣﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺭ ﻣﺭﺣﻠﻪ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ً ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻘﺎ ﺟﺩﺍ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺟﺩی ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻫﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ LG‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺣﻕ ﺑﺭﺧﻭﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺷﺧﻳﺹ ﺧﻭﺩﺵ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺩﻝ ﻫﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ ﻭ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺗﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻫﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺩﻝ ﮔﻭﺷﯽ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﯽ‬
‫‪114‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ‪ LG Mobile‬ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‬
‫)‪(OTA‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺗﯽ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻧﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ‪ OTA‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺗﺭ ﺑﻪﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ‪ LG‬ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻣﺷﺗﺭک ﻣﺭﮐﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﻥ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﺧﺻﯽ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺣﻝ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ‪ -‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻣﻠﻪ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ Google‬ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ‪/‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻫﺭﮔﻭﻧﻪ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺟﻭﺯ ‪ DRM‬ﺷﻣﺎ ‪ -‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺭﻭ ‪ LG‬ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ LG .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺑﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻫﻳﭻ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺗﯽ ﻧﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ ﺑﺳﺗﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﯽ‬
‫‪115‬‬
‫ﺳﺅﺍﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺗﺩﺍﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺑﺧﺵ ﭼﻧﺩ ﻣﺷﮑﻝ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺷﮑﻼﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮐﺛﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺗﯽ ﺑﺭﻁﺭﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻳﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺩﻻﻳﻝ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺭﻁﺭﻑ‬
‫ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺷﮑﻝ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺎی ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻫﻳﭻ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺗﺑﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ‪/‬‬
‫ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻳﮕﻧﺎﻝ ﺿﻌﻳﻑ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻣﺧﺎﺑﺭﺍﺗﯽ ﻫﺳﺗﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﻣﺕ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺿﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺭﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺷﻪ ﭘﻭﺷﺵ ﺩﻫﯽ ﺍﭘﺭﺍﺗﻭﺭ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻳﭻ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍی‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ‬
‫ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺛﺑﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﺳﺭﻭﻳﺱ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺧﻁﺎﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﮔﻳﺭی‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻳﺳﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻐﻭ ﻧﺻﺏ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺎی ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی‬
‫ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺄﻳﻳﺩ ﻧﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﻳﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﺷﺎﻧﮕﺭ ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪116‬‬
‫ﭘﻳﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺩﻻﻳﻝ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺭﻁﺭﻑ‬
‫ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺷﮑﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻥ ﺧﻳﻠﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻁﻣﺋﻥ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎی ﻣﻌﻣﻭﻟﯽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﮑﻝ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺗﺎژ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺭﻭﺟﯽ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﯽ ﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺧﺭﺍﺏ ﺍﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﺷﺗﺑﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ‪LG‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی‬
‫ﻣﺟﺎﺯ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻳﺭی ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻭی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻳﺭﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‬
‫ﻓﺭﻣﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻓﺭﻣﺕ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﮑﻝ ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭی‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻭﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺣﻔﻅﻪ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻗﺳﻣﺕ ﺍﻁﺭﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻧﭘﻭﺷﺎﻧﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﺣﻝ ﺍﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺣﺳﮕﺭ ﻧﻭﺭی ﺗﻣﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺩﺍﻳﯽ ﭘﺧﺵ‬
‫ﻧﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻟﺭﺯﺵ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺕ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻧﻭی ﺻﺩﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻁﻣﺋﻥ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻟﺭﺯﺵ ﻳﺎ ”ﻣﺯﺍﺣﻡ ﻧﺷﻭﻳﺩ“ ﻧﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺎی ﺷﺎﺭژ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﯽ‬
‫‪117‬‬
‫ﭘﻳﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺩﻻﻳﻝ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﯽ‬
‫ﻗﻁﻊ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻝ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﺏ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺭﻡﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺳﺧﺕﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺭﻁﺭﻑ‬
‫ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺷﮑﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی ﻣﺟﺩﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﻗﻁﻊ ﻣﯽﺷﻭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻔﻝ‬
‫ﻣﯽﮐﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻧﺩﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻣﺎﻧﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻣﻪﻫﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻟﻣﺳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻧﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﺭﺩﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺕ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻠﻳﺩﻫﺎی ﺻﺩﺍ ﮐﻡ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺭﻭﺵﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﺷﮑﻝ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻝ‬
‫ﻧﮑﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ‬
‫< ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﮔﻳﺭی ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ <‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‬
‫ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺫﻑ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻫﻣﻪ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻡ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺛﺑﺕ ﮐﺭﺩﻩﺍﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﭘﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻫﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﯽ‬
‫‪118‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﺿﺩ ﺳﺭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﮔﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﻳﺵ ﻓﺭﺽ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺍﻓﺭﺍﺩ ﻧﺗﻭﺍﻧﻧﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺛﻼً ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻡ ﮐﺭﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺯﺩﻳﺩﻧﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺗﺵ ﭘﺎک ﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﺭﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﺷﻣﺎ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻬﺎ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻳﮏ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﮔﻡ ﺷﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺯﺩﻳﺩﻧﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻧﻭی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺎک ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻧﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﮕﺭ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﺗﺎﻥ ﭘﺎک ﺷﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﺩ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺑﺭﺳﺎﻧﺩ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﻣﺟﺩﺩﺍً ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺁﻣﺩ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﻋﺑﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ Google‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﻳﺵ ﻓﺭﺽ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻁﻣﻳﻧﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻭﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺭﺩی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻁﻣﻳﻧﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺗﻣﺎ ً ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﭘﻳﺵ ﻓﺭﺽ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪Google‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯی‬
‫ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﻳﺵ ﻓﺭﺽ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﯽ‬
‫‪119‬‬
‫ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻁﻼﻋﻳﻪ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﻣﻧﺑﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﮐﺩ ‪ GPL ،LGPL ،MPL‬ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺍﻣﺗﻳﺎﺯ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻧﺑﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻧﻣﺎی ‪ http://opensource.lge.com‬ﺩﻳﺩﻥ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺭ ﮐﺩ ﻣﻧﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻣﺎﻣﯽ ﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻣﺗﻳﺎﺯ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺩ ﺗﻌﻬﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﻳﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﭘﯽ ﺭﺍﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻝ ﺟﯽ ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﮑﺱ ﺑﺭ ﺭﻭی ﻟﻭﺡ ﻓﺷﺭﺩﻩ ﺍی ﮐﺩ ﻣﻧﺑﻊ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﻅﻭﺭ ﺗﺎﻣﻳﻥ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺍﺟﺭﺍی ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ )ﻧﻅﻳﺭ ﻫﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻣﺩﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻣﻝ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻝ( ﺭﺍ ﺗﻬﻳﻪ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪ opensource@lge.com‬ﺩﺭﺧﻭﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻔﺭﺳﺗﻳﺩ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺩﺕ ‪ 3‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺭﻳﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺍﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﻣﻧﯽ )ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﻧﺎﺳﻪ ﻣﻘﺭﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﭼﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﮑﯽ ﻭ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭﻩ(‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺭﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻧﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ < ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ < ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻣﻧﯽ ﺑﺭﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﺋﻡ ﺗﺟﺎﺭی‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺣﻕ ﮐﭘﯽ ‪ ©2017 LG Electronics، Inc.‬ﮐﻠﻳﻪ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ LG .‬ﻭ ﺁﺭﻡ‬
‫‪ LG‬ﻋﻼﺋﻡ ﺗﺟﺎﺭی ﺛﺑﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ ‪ LG Group‬ﻭ ﺷﺭﮐﺕ ﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫™‪ Duo™ ،YouTube™ ،Gmail™ ،Google Maps™ ،Google‬ﻭ‬
‫™‪ Play Play‬ﻣﺎﺭک ﻫﺎی ﺗﺟﺎﺭی ‪ Google, Inc‬ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫®‪ Bluetooth‬ﻋﻼﻣﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭی ﺛﺑﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ ‪ Bluetooth SIG, Inc.‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺭﺍﺳﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫®‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭ ﺁﺭﻡ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻼﺋﻡ ﺗﺟﺎﺭی ﺛﺑﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ ‪ Wi-Fi Alliance‬ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﻋﻼﺋﻡ ﺗﺟﺎﺭی ﻭ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﮐﭘﯽ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻣﺎﻟﮑﻳﺕ ﺻﺎﺣﺑﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﯽ‬
‫‪120‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﺍﻧﻁﺑﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻳﻧﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ‪ LG Electronics ،‬ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ‪LG-M710ds‬‬
‫ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻳﺎﺯﻣﻧﺩی ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ‪ 2014/53/EU‬ﺳﺎﺧﺗﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﮏ ﮐﭘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻁﺑﺎﻕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ‪ http://www.lg.com/global/declaration‬ﺑﻳﺎﺑﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﯽ‬
‫‪121‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﮐﻠﻳﻪ ﻟﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﺑﺭﻗﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﮏ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺟﺩﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎی ﺷﻬﺭی ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺩﻭﻟﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺍﻣﺭ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻳﺎﻓﺗﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﻓﻊ ﮔﺭﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻭﺯ ﻋﻭﺍﺭﺽ ﻣﻧﻔﯽ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﯽ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺳﺕ ﻭ ﺳﻼﻣﺕ ﺍﻧﺳﺎﻥ ﺟﻠﻭﮔﻳﺭی ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﮐﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺳﺏ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ً‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﻬﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺣﻝ ﺧﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺭﻳﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﺭﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﻫﺎی ﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺍﺯ ‪ 0.0005%‬ﺟﻳﻭﻩ‪ 0.002% ،‬ﮐﻠﺳﻳﻡ ﻳﺎ ‪ 0.004%‬ﺳﺭﺏ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺕ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﺋﻡ ﺷﻳﻣﻳﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻳﻭﻩ )‪ ،(Hg‬ﮐﻠﺳﻳﻡ‬
‫)‪ (Cd‬ﻳﺎ ﺳﺭﺏ )‪ (Pb‬ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﮐﻠﻳﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺑﺎﺗﺭیﻫﺎی ﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺟﺩﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎی ﺷﻬﺭی ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺩﻭﻟﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺍﻣﺭ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻳﺎﻓﺗﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﻓﻊ ﮔﺭﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺑﺎﺗﺭیﻫﺎی ﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻭﺯ ﻋﻭﺍﺭﺽ ﻣﻧﻔﯽ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﯽ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﺯﻳﺳﺕ ﻭ ﺳﻼﻣﺕ ﺍﻧﺳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺣﻳﻭﺍﻥ ﺟﻠﻭﮔﻳﺭی ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﮐﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺳﺏ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺑﺎﺗﺭیﻫﺎی‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ً ﺑﺎ ﺷﻬﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﻣﺣﻝ ﺧﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺭﻭﺷﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺭﻳﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﺭﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﯽ‬
‫‪122‬‬
ENGLISH
About this user guide
Thank you for choosing this LG product. Please carefully read this user
guide before using the device for the first time to ensure safe and proper
use.
• Always use genuine LG accessories. The supplied items are designed
only for this device and may not be compatible with other devices.
• This device is not suitable for people who have a visual impairment due
to the touchscreen keyboard.
• Descriptions are based on the device default settings.
• Default apps on the device are subject to updates, and support for
these apps may be withdrawn without prior notice. If you have any
questions about an app provided with the device, please contact an
LG Service Centre. For user-installed apps, please contact the relevant
service provider.
• Modifying the device’s operating system or installing software from
unofficial sources may damage the device and lead to data corruption
or data loss. Such actions will violate your LG licence agreement and
void your warranty.
• Some content and illustrations may differ from your device, depending
on the area, service provider, software version, or OS version, and are
subject to change without prior notice.
• Software, audio, wallpaper, images, and other media supplied with
your device are licenced for limited use. If you extract and use these
materials for commercial or other purposes, you may be infringing
copyright laws. As a user, you are fully responsible for the illegal use of
media.
• Additional charges may incur for data services, such as messaging,
uploading,downloading, auto-syncing and location services. To void
additional charges, select a data plan suitable to your needs. Contact
your service provider to obtain additional details.
1
Instructional notices
WARNING: Situations that could cause injury to the user and third
parties.
CAUTION: Situations that may cause minor injury or damage to the
device.
NOTE: Notices or additional information.
2
Table of contents
5
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
01
02
Custom-designed
Features
Basic Functions
13
15
16
19
20
22
23
Notes on Water Resistant
Properties
QuickButton
Fingerprint recognition
quick share
QuickMemo+
Multi-tasking feature
QSlide
25
26
28
29
32
33
34
36
40
46
49
50
51
57
58
Product components and
accessories
Parts overview
Turning the power on or off
Installing the SIM card
Inserting the memory card
Removing the memory card
Charging the battery
Touch screen
Home screen
Screen lock
Memory card encryption
Taking screenshots
Entering text
Content sharing
Do not disturb
3
03
04
Useful Apps
Settings
60
61
62
66
67
76
79
80
81
82
83
84
84
85
85
85
87
89
89
90
90
91
94
94
106
107
109
Installing and uninstalling apps
Uninstalled apps
Phone
Messaging
Camera
Gallery
Music
E-mail
Calendar
Calculator
Clock
Downloads
File Manager
Voice Recorder
FM Radio
LG Health
Contacts
Tasks
LG Backup
RemoteCall Service
Chrome
Google apps
Table of contents
Settings
Networks
Sound & notification
Display
General
05
Appendix
118
118
119
121
124
125
LG Language Settings
LG Bridge
Phone software update
FAQ
Anti-Theft Guide
More information
Regulatory information
(Regulation ID number,
E-labeling, etc.)
4
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
Please read these simple guidelines. Not following these guidelines may be
dangerous or illegal.
Should a fault occur, a software tool is built into your device that will gather a
fault log. This tool gathers only data specific to the fault, such as signal strength,
cell ID position in sudden call drop and applications loaded. The log is used only to
help determine the cause of the fault. These logs are encrypted and can only be
accessed by an authorised LG Repair centre should you need to return your device
for repair.
Exposure to radio frequency energy
Radio wave exposure and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) information.
This device has been designed to comply with applicable safety requirements for
exposure to radio waves. These requirements are based on scientific guidelines that
include safety margins designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of
age and health.
• The radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known
as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. Tests for SAR are conducted using
standardised methods with the device transmitting at its highest certified
power level in all used frequency bands.
• While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various LG device
models, they are all designed to meet the relevant guidelines for exposure to
radio waves.
• The SAR limit recommended by the International Commission on Non-Ionizing
Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) is 2 W/kg averaged over 10 g of tissue.
• The highest SAR value for this model tested for use at the ear is 0.454 W/kg
(10 g) and when worn on the body is 1.540 W/kg (10 g).
• This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use
position against the ear or when positioned at least 5 mm away from the body.
When a carry case, belt clip or holder is used for body-worn operation, it should
not contain metal and should position the product at least 5 mm away from
your body. In order to transmit data files or messages, this device requires a
quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data files
or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Ensure the
above separation distance instructions are followed until the transmission is
completed.
5
Product care and maintenance
• Use only in-box accessories which are authorised by LG. LG does not guarantee
any damage or failure which is caused by third party accessories.
• Some contents and illustrations may differ from your device without prior
notice.
• Do not disassemble this unit. Take it to a qualified service technician when repair
work is required.
• Repairs under warranty, at LG’s discretion, may include replacement parts
or boards that are either new or reconditioned, provided that they have
functionality equal to that of the parts being replaced.
• Keep away from electrical appliances such as TVs, radios and personal
computers.
• The unit should be kept away from heat sources such as radiators or cookers.
• Do not drop.
• Do not subject this unit to mechanical vibration or shock.
• Switch off the device in any area where you are required to by special
regulations. For example, do not use your device in hospitals as it may affect
sensitive medical equipment.
• Do not handle the device with wet hands while it is being charged. It may cause
an electric shock and can seriously damage your device.
• Do not charge a handset near flammable material as the handset can become
hot and create a fire hazard.
• Use a dry cloth to clean the exterior of the unit (do not use solvents such as
benzene, thinner or alcohol).
• Do not charge the device when it is on soft furnishings.
• The device should be charged in a well ventilated area.
• Do not subject this unit to excessive smoke or dust.
• Do not keep the device next to credit cards or transport tickets; it can affect the
information on the magnetic strips.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
6
• Do not tap the screen with a sharp object as it may damage the device.
• Do not expose the device to liquid or moisture.
• Use accessories like earphones cautiously. Do not touch the antenna
unnecessarily.
• Do not use, touch or attempt to remove or fix broken, chipped or cracked glass.
Damage to the glass display due to abuse or misuse is not covered under the
warranty.
• Your device is an electronic device that generates heat during normal operation.
Extremely prolonged, direct skin contact in the absence of adequate ventilation
may result in discomfort or minor burns. Therefore, use care when handling your
device during or immediately after operation.
• If your device gets wet, immediately unplug it to dry off completely. Do not
attempt to accelerate the drying process with an external heating source, such
as an oven, microwave or hair dryer.
Efficient device operation
Electronics devices
All devices may receive interference, which could affect performance.
• Do not use your device near medical equipment without requesting permission.
Please consult your doctor to determine if operation of your device may
interfere with the operation of your medical device.
• Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that you leave at least 15 cm of space
between other devices and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the
pacemaker.
• This device may produce a bright or flashing light.
• Some hearing aids might be disturbed by devices.
• Minor interference may affect TVs, radios, PCs etc.
• Use your device in temperatures between 0 ºC and 40 ºC, if possible. Exposing
your device to extremely low or high temperatures may result in damage,
malfunction, or even explosion.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
7
Road safety
Check the laws and regulations on the use of devices in the area when you drive.
• Do not use a hand-held device while driving.
• Give full attention to driving.
• Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions
so require.
• RF energy may affect some electronic systems in your vehicle such as car
stereos and safety equipment.
• When your vehicle is equipped with an air bag, do not obstruct with installed
or portable wireless equipment. It can cause the air bag to fail or cause serious
injury due to improper performance.
• If you are listening to music whilst out and about, please ensure that the volume
is at a reasonable level so that you are aware of your surroundings. This is of
particular importance when near roads.
Avoid damage to your hearing
To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume
levels for long periods.
Damage to your hearing can occur if you are exposed to loud sound for long
periods of time. We therefore recommend that you do not turn on or off the
handset close to your ear. We also recommend that music and call volumes are set
to a reasonable level.
• When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot hear the people
speaking near you, or if the person sitting next to you can hear what you are
listening to.
• Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause
hearing loss.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
8
Glass Parts
Some parts of your device are made of glass. This glass could break if your device is
dropped on a hard surface or receives a substantial impact. If the glass breaks, do
not touch or attempt to remove it. Stop using your device until the glass is replaced
by an authorised service provider.
Blasting area
Do not use the device where blasting is in progress. Observe restrictions and follow
any regulations or rules.
Potentially explosive atmospheres
• Do not use your device at a refueling point.
• Do not use near fuel or chemicals.
• Do not transport or store flammable gas, liquid or explosives in the same
compartment of your vehicle as your device or accessories.
In aircraft
Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft.
• Turn your device off before boarding any aircraft.
• Do not use it on the ground without permission from the crew.
Children
Keep the device in a safe place out of the reach of small children. It includes small
parts which may cause a choking hazard if detached.
Emergency calls
Emergency calls may not be available on all mobile networks. Therefore you should
never depend solely on your device for emergency calls. Check with your local
service provider.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
9
Battery information and care
• You do not need to completely discharge the battery before recharging. Unlike
other battery systems, there is no memory effect that could compromise the
battery’s performance.
• Use only LG batteries and chargers. LG chargers are designed to maximise the
battery life.
• Do not disassemble or short-circuit the battery.
• Replace the battery when it no longer provides acceptable performance. The
battery pack may be recharged hundreds of times before it needs replacing.
• Recharge the battery if it has not been used for a long time to maximise
usability.
• Do not expose the battery charger to direct sunlight or use it in high humidity,
such as in the bathroom.
• Do not leave the battery in hot or cold places, as this may deteriorate battery
performance.
• Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used
batteries according to the instructions.
• Always unplug the charger from the wall socket after the device is fully charged
to save unnecessary power consumption of the charger.
• Actual battery life will depend on network configuration, product settings,
usage patterns, battery and environmental conditions.
• Make sure that no sharp-edged items such as animal’s teeth or nails, come into
contact with the battery. This could cause a fire.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
10
Securing personal information
• Make sure to protect your personal information to prevent data leakage or
misuse of sensitive information.
• Always back up important data while using the device. LG is not responsible for
any data loss.
• Make sure to back up all data and reset the device when disposing of the device
to prevent any misuse of sensitive information.
• Read the permission screen carefully while downloading applications.
• Be cautious using the applications that have access to multiple functions or to
your personal information.
• Check your personal accounts regularly. If you find any sign of misuse of your
personal information, ask your service provider to delete or change your account
information.
• If your device is lost or stolen, change the password of your account to secure
your personal information.
• Do not use applications from unknown sources.
Fast charging adapter information
• A charging adapter that supports fast charging is included with the product.
• The fast charging feature may not function if a fast charging adapter other than
the genuine adapter provided with the product is used.
Notice for Battery replacement
• For your safety, do not remove the battery incorporated in the product.
If you need to replace the battery, take it to the nearest authorized
LG Electronics service point or dealer for assistance.
• Li-Ion Battery is a hazardous component which can cause injury.
• Battery replacement by non-qualified professional can cause damage
to your device.
Guidelines for safe and efficient use
11
01
Custom-designed
Features
Notes on Water Resistant
Properties
This product is water and dust resistant in compliance with the Ingress
Protection rating IP68.
Your product has undergone testing in a controlled environment and is
proven to be water and dust resistant in certain circumstances (meets
the requirements of classification IP68 as described by the international
standard IEC 60529 - Degrees of Protection provided by Enclosures [IP
Code]; test conditions: 15-35 ºC, 86-106kPa, 1.5 meter, for 30 minutes).
Do not expose the device in conditions that are different from the test
conditions. Results may vary in actual use.
WARNING
Despite a rating of IP68, your device is not impervious to conditions not
tested in LG’s controlled environment. Please note that any damages that
occur due to such causes changes the colour of the LDI (Liquid Damage
Indicator). If the colour of LDI located inside the product changes, the
product is to be considered ineligible for any free-ofcharge repair services
provided under the product’s limited warranty.
Avoid exposing the product to environments with excessive dust or
moisture. Do not use the product in the following environments.
Do not immerse the product in any liquid chemicals (soap, etc.)
other than water.
Do not immerse the product in salt water, including seawater.
Do not immerse the product in a hot spring.
Do not swim with this product.
Do not place the product directly on sand (such as at a beach) or
mud.
Custom-designed Features
13
Do not immerse your product in water deeper than approximately
1.5 meters.
Do not immerse your product in water for longer than 30 minutes.
• If your product becomes wet be sure to wipe the microphone, speaker,
and stereo jack with a dry cloth before use.
• Should your product or your hands become wet, dry them before
handling the product.
• Do not use the product in places where it may be sprayed with high
pressure water (e.g. near a faucet or shower head) or submerge it in
water for extended periods of time, as the product is not designed to
withstand high water pressure.
• This product is not resistant to shock. Do not drop the product or
subject it to shock. Doing so might damage or deform the main unit,
causing water leakage.
• The product’s water and dust resistant features may be damaged by
dropping or receiving an impact.
• If the product gets wet, use a clean, soft cloth to dry it thoroughly.
• The touch screen and other features may not work properly if the
device is used while wet.
• Your product is water resistant only when the SIM/Memory card tray is
properly inserted into the product.
• Do not open or close the SIM/Memory card tray while the product is
wet or immersed in water. Exposing the open tray to water or moisture
may damage the product.
• The SIM/Memory card tray contains rubber [packing] to help prevent
dust, water, or moisture from entering the product. Do not damage the
rubber [packing] as this may allow dust, water, or moisture to enter
your product and cause damage.
• Failure to follow the provided instructions may invalidate your device’s
limited warranty.
Custom-designed Features
14
QuickButton
You can use the hot key to directly launch apps, or turn a feature on or off.
Outdoor Essentials
1 Press once on the QuickButton.
2 Select your desired tool.
Globe Mode
1 Double press the QuickButton.
2 Turn Glove mode on or off.
• If you enable the Glove mode feature, you can use the touch screen
while wearing gloves.
• Make sure that Glove Mode is turned off for normal operation when
gloves are not used.
Settings
1 Press and hold the QuickButton.
2 Select your desired setting.
Custom-designed Features
15
Fingerprint recognition
Fingerprint recognition overview
You must register your fingerprint on your device first before using the
fingerprint recognition function.
You can use the fingerprint recognition function in the following cases:
• To unlock the screen.
• To view the locked content in the Gallery or QuickMemo+.
• Confirm a purchase by signing in to an app or identifying yourself with
your fingerprint.
• Your fingerprint can be used by the device for user identification. Very
similar fingerprints from different users may be recognised by the
fingerprint sensor as the same fingerprint.
Precautions for fingerprint recognition
Fingerprint recognition accuracy may decrease due to a number of
reasons. To maximise the recognition accuracy, check the following before
using the device.
• The device’s Home key has a fingerprint sensor. Ensure that the Home
key is not damaged by a metallic object, such as coin or key.
• When water, dust or other foreign substance is on the Home key or
your finger, the fingerprint registration or recognition may not work.
Clean and dry your finger before having the fingerprint recognised.
• A fingerprint may not be recognised properly if the surface of your
finger has a scar or is not smooth due to being soaked in water.
• If you bend your finger or use the fingertip only, your fingerprint may
not be recognised. Make sure that your finger covers the entire surface
of the Home key.
• Scan only one finger for each registration. Scanning more than one
finger may affect fingerprint registration and recognition.
Custom-designed Features
16
• The device may generate static electricity if the surrounding air is
dry. If the surrounding air is dry, avoid scanning fingerprints, or touch
a metallic object such as coin or key before scanning fingerprints to
remove static electricity.
Registering fingerprints
You can register and save your fingerprint on the device to use fingerprint
identification.
1 Press
Settings General Fingerprints & security
Fingerprints.
• A lock screen must be set in order to be able to use this feature.
• If the screen lock is not active, configure the lock screen by following the
on-screen instructions. See Setting a screen lock for details.
2 Locate the Home key on the front of the device and gently put your
finger on it to register the fingerprint.
• Gently press the Home key so that the sensor can recognise your
fingerprint.
• Ensure that your fingertip covers the entire surface of the sensor of the
Home key.
Custom-designed Features
17
3 Follow the on-screen instructions.
• Repeat scanning the fingerprint by moving your finger little by little
until the fingerprint registers.
4 When the fingerprint registration is done, tap OK.
• Tap ADD MORE to register another fingerprint. If you register
only one fingerprint and the corresponding finger is not in a good
condition, the fingerprint recognition may not work well. As the
preventive measure against this kind of situation, register multiple
fingerprints.
Managing fingerprints
You can edit or delete registered fingerprints.
1 Press
Settings General Fingerprints & security
Fingerprints.
2 Unlock according to the specified lock method.
3 From the fingerprint list, tap a fingerprint to rename it. To delete it, tap
.
Unlocking the screen with a fingerprint
You can unlock the screen or view the locked content by using your
fingerprint. Activate the desired function:
1 Press
Settings General Fingerprints & security
Fingerprints.
2 Unlock according to the specified lock method.
3 On the fingerprint settings screen, activate the desired function:
• Screen lock: Unlock the screen with a fingerprint.
• Content lock: Unlock content with a fingerprint. To do this, make
sure that the content lock is set.
Custom-designed Features
18
quick share
You can share a photo or video to the app you want immediately after
taking it.
, then take a photo or record a video.
1 Press
2 Tap the app icon that appears on the screen to share it using that app.
You can also swipe the icon towards the opposite direction to see
what other apps you can use to share your photos and videos.
quick share icon
• The app displayed by the quick share icon may vary, depending on the
type and frequency of access to the apps installed on the device.
Custom-designed Features
19
QuickMemo+
QuickMemo+ overview
You can make creative notes by using a variety of options on this
advanced notepad feature, such as image management and screenshots,
which are not supported by the conventional notepad.
Creating a note
QuickMemo+.
1 Press
2 Tap to create a note.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
: Save a note.
: Undo the last action.
: Redo the last action you undid.
: Enter a note by using the keypad.
: Write notes by hand.
: Erase handwritten notes.
: Zoom in or out, rotate or erase the parts of a handwritten note.
: Access additional options, including sharing and locking notes,
changing the note pad style and inserting content.
3 Tap
to save the note.
Writing notes on a photo
QuickMemo+.
1 Press
2 Tap to take a photo, then tap OK.
• The photo is automatically attached into the notepad.
3 Tap
or to write notes on the photo.
• Write notes by hand on the photo.
• Enter text below the photo.
4 Tap
to save the note.
Custom-designed Features
20
Writing notes on a screenshot
1 While viewing the screen you want to capture, drag the status bar
downwards and then tap .
• The screenshot appears as the notepad background theme. Memo
tools appear at the top of the screen.
2 Take notes as desired.
• Write notes by hand on the photo.
3 Tap
and save the notes to the location you want.
• Saved notes can be viewed in either QuickMemo+ or Gallery.
• To save notes in the same location all the time, select the Use as
default app checkbox and select an app.
Managing folders
You can view notes grouped by the type of the notes.
QuickMemo+.
1 Press
2 At the top of the screen, tap and select a menu item:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
All memos: View all notes saved in QuickMemo+.
My memos: View notes created by QuickMemo+.
Photo memos: View notes created by .
Capture+: View notes created by .
Trash: View deleted notes.
New category: Add categories.
: Rearrange, add or delete categories. To change the name of a
category, tap the category.
• Some folders do not appear when launching QuickMemo+ for the first
time. Disabled folders are enabled and appear when they contain at
least one related note.
Custom-designed Features
21
Multi-tasking feature
Multi window
You can use two apps at the same time by separating the screen into the
multiple windows.
from the Home touch buttons,
While using an app, press and hold
then select an app from the recently used apps list.
• You can use two apps displayed on the main screen at the same time.
.
• To stop the Multi window feature, press
• You can use this feature in an app that supports the Multi window
feature.
• The Multi window feature is not supported by some apps, including
downloaded apps.
Overview screen
The Overview screen provides a preview of your recently used apps.
, then tap the
To view the list of recently used apps, press
displayed app.
Custom-designed Features
22
QSlide
You can start apps by using QSlide to use them while other apps are
running. For example, use the calendar when a video is playing.
QSlide.
When an app is running, tap
• This feature may not be supported by some apps.
•
•
•
•
: Turn off the QSlide mode to switch to full-screen mode.
: Adjust the opacity of the QSlide window. If the QSlide window is
transparent, it will not respond to touch inputs.
: Close the QSlide window.
: Adjust the size of the QSlide window.
Custom-designed Features
23
02
Basic Functions
Product components and
accessories
The following items are included with your device.
• Device
• Fast charger
• Ejection pin
• USB cable
• Quick Start Guide
• Stereo headset
• The items described above may be optional.
• The items supplied with the device and any available accessories may
vary depending on the area and service provider.
• Always use genuine LG Electronics accessories. Using accessories made
by other manufacturers may affect your device's call performance or
cause malfunctions. This may not be covered by LG's repair service.
• If any of these basic items are missing, contact the dealer from which
you purchased your device.
• To purchase additional basic items, contact an LG Customer Service
Centre.
• To purchase optional items, contact an LG Customer Service Centre for
available dealers.
• Some items in the product box are subject to change without notice.
• The appearance and specifications of your device are subject to change
without notice.
• Device specifications may vary depending on the area or service provider.
• Be sure to use authentic accessories provided by LG Electronics. Using
third-party accessories may damage the device or cause malfunctions.
Basic Functions
25
Parts overview
Proximity/Ambient light
sensor
Earpiece
Front camera lens
Notification LED
QuickButton
Volume keys (+/-)
Power/Lock key
Touch screen
SIM/microSD card tray
Fingerprint sensor/Home
key
Stereo headset jack
Microphone
Flash
Rear camera lens
NFC area
Speaker
Charger/USB cable port
Basic Functions
26
• Proximity/Ambient light sensor
- Proximity sensor: During a call, the proximity sensor turns off the
screen and disables touch functionality when the device is in close
proximity to the human body. It turns the screen back on and enables
touch functionality when the device is outside a specific range.
- Ambient light sensor: The ambient light sensor analyses the ambient
light intensity when the auto-brightness control mode is turned on.
• Volume keys
- Adjust the volume for ringtones, calls or notifications.
- While using the Camera, gently press a Volume key to take a photo.
To take continuous shots of photos, press and hold the Volume key.
- Press the Volume Down (-) key twice to launch the Camera app
when the screen is locked or turned off. Press the Volume Up (+) key
twice to launch Capture+.
• Power/Lock key
- Briefly press the key when you want to turn the screen on or off.
- Press and hold the key when you want to select a power control
option.
• Fingerprint sensor/Home key
- Turn on the fingerprint recognition feature to simplify the process
of unlocking the screen. See Fingerprint recognition overview for
details.
• This device has a non-removable battery. Do not attempt to remove the
back cover.
• Some functions may be restricted for access, depending on the device
specifications.
• On the rear of the device includes a built-in NFC antenna. Be cautious
when handling the device to avoid damaging or covering the NFC
antenna.
• Do not put heavy objects on the device or sit on it. Failure to do so may
damage the touch screen.
Basic Functions
27
• Screen-protective film or accessories may interfere with the proximity
sensor.
• If your device is wet or is being used in a humid place, the touch screen
or buttons may not function properly.
• Your device has a dual-layer screen system. The top layer is a protection
screen and the bottom layer is a fixed screen. The protection screen
must always be in place to help protect the fixed screen layer from
shatter damage. The protection screen comes pre-installed on your
device. Scratches can happen during normal use.
Turning the power on or off
Turning the power on
When the power is turned off, press and hold the Power/Lock key.
• When the device is turned on for the first time, initial configuration
takes place. The first booting time for the smart phone may be longer
than usual.
Turning the power off
Press and hold the Power/Lock key, then select Power off.
Power control options
Press and hold the Power/Lock key, then select an option.
• Power off: Turn off the device.
• Power off and restart: Restart the device.
• Turn on Airplane mode: Block telecommunication-related functions,
including making phone calls, messaging and browsing the Internet.
Other functions remain available.
Basic Functions
28
Installing the SIM card
Insert the SIM card provided by the device service provider to start using
your device.
• Be careful with the ejection pin since it has a sharp edge.
• Do not insert a memory card into the SIM card slot. If a memory card
happens to be lodged in the SIM card slot, take the device to a LG
Service Center to remove the memory card.
• In order for the water-resistant and dust-resistant features to work
effectively, the card tray must be inserted correctly.
1 Insert the ejection pin into the hole on the card tray.
Basic Functions
29
2 Pull out the card tray.
3 Put the SIM card on the card tray with the gold-colored contacts
facing downwards.
Basic Functions
30
4 Insert the card tray back into the slot.
• This device supports only Nano SIM cards.
• For problem-free performance, it is recommended to use the phone
with the correct type of SIM card. Always use a factory-made SIM card
supplied by your service provider.
• If you insert the card tray into your device while the card tray is wet,
your device may be damaged. Always make sure the card tray is dry.
Precautions when using the SIM card
• Do not lose your SIM card. LG is not responsible for damage and other
issues caused by loss or transfer of a SIM card.
• Be careful not to damage the SIM card when you insert or remove it.
Basic Functions
31
Inserting the memory card
The device supports up to a 2 TB microSD card. Depending on the
memory card manufacturer and type, some memory cards may not be
compatible with your device.
• It is recommended to use exFAT file system when using external
memory more than 32GB.
• Some memory cards may not be fully compatible with the device. If you
use an incompatible card, it may damage the device or the memory card,
or corrupt the data stored in it.
1 Insert the ejection pin into the hole on the card tray.
2 Pull out the card tray.
3 Put the memory card on the card tray with the gold-coloured contacts
facing downwards.
Memory card
(optional)
SIM card
• The memory card is an optional item and is sold separately.
• Frequent writing and erasing of data may shorten the memory card
lifespan.
Basic Functions
32
4 Insert the card tray back into the slot.
• Some memory cards may not be fully compatible with the device. If you
use an incompatible card, it may damage the device or the memory card,
or corrupt the data stored in it.
Removing the memory card
Unmount the memory card before removing it for safety.
Settings General Storage
.
1 Press
2 Insert the ejection pin into the hole on the card tray.
3 Pull out the card tray and remove the memory card.
• Do not remove the memory card while the device is transferring or
accessing information. This may cause data to be lost or corrupted, or
may damage the memory card or the device. LG is not responsible for
losses that result from the abuse or improper use of memory cards,
including the loss of data.
Basic Functions
33
Charging the battery
Before using the device, fully charge the battery.
Connect one end of the charging cable to the charger, insert the other end
of the cable into the cable port, and then plug the charger into a power
socket.
Charging cable
terminal
• Do not charge while the device or charging cable is wet or contains
moisture. This can cause fire, electric shock, injury or damage to device.
• Make sure to use the USB cable provided with your device.
• Make sure to use an LG-approved charger and charging cable. Charging
the battery with a third-party charger may cause the battery to explode
or may damage the device.
• Using the device when it is charging may cause electric shock. To use the
device, stop charging it.
• This device has a non-removable battery. Do not attempt to remove the
back cover.
Basic Functions
34
• Remove the charger from the power socket after the device is fully
charged. This prevents unnecessary power consumption.
• A charging adapter that supports fast charging is included with the
product.
• The fast charging feature may not work if a fast charging adapter other
than the genuine adapter provided with the product is used.
• Another way to charge the battery is by connecting a USB cable
between the device and a desktop or laptop computer. This may take a
longer time than plugging the adapter to a wall outlet.
• Do not charge the battery by using a USB hub that is unable to maintain
the rated voltage. Charging may fail or unintentionally stop.
Precautions when using the device
• Ensure that the inside of the device does not make contact with a
metallic object or water.
• Make sure to use the USB cable provided; do not use third party USB
cables or chargers with your device. The LG limited warranty does not
cover the use of third party accessories.
• Failure to follow the instructions in this guide and improper use may
damage the device.
Using the battery efficiently
Battery lifespan may decrease if you keep many apps and functions
running simultaneously and continuously.
Cancel background operations to increase battery life.
To minimise battery consumption, follow these tips:
• Turn off the Bluetooth® or Wi-Fi network function when not using
them.
• Set the screen timeout to as short a time as possible.
• Minimise the screen brightness.
• Set a screen lock when the device is not used.
• Check the battery usage details and close any downloaded apps that
are draining the battery.
Basic Functions
35
Touch screen
You can familiarise yourself with how to control your device by using
touch screen gestures.
Tapping
Lightly tap with your fingertip to select or run an app or option.
Touching and holding
Touch and hold for several seconds to display a menu with available
options.
Basic Functions
36
Double-tapping
Tap twice quickly to zoom in or out on a web page or map.
Dragging
Touch and hold an item, such as an app or widget, then move your finger
to another location in a controlled motion. You can use this gesture to
move an item.
Basic Functions
37
Swiping
Tap the screen with your finger and move it quickly without pausing. You
can use this gesture to scroll through a list, a web page, photos, screens,
and more.
Pinching and spreading
Pinch two fingers to zoom out such as on a photo or map. To zoom in,
spread your fingers apart.
• Do not expose the touch screen to excessive physical shock. You might
damage the touch sensor.
Basic Functions
38
• A touch screen failure may occur if you use the device near a magnetic,
metallic or conductive material.
• If you use the device under bright lights, such as direct sunlight, the
screen may not be visible, depending on your position. Use the device
in a shady location or a location with an ambient light that is not too
bright and bright enough to read books.
• Do not press the screen with excessive force.
• Gently tap with your fingertip on the option you want.
• Touch control may not work properly if you tap while wearing a glove or
by using the tip of your fingernail.
• Touch control may not work properly if the screen is moist or wet.
• The touch screen may not function properly if a screen-protective film
or accessory purchased from a third party store is attached to the
device.
• Displaying a static image for extended periods of time may result in
afterimages or screen burn-in. Turn off the screen when you do not use
the device for a long time.
Basic Functions
39
Home screen
Home screen overview
The Home screen is the starting point for accessing various functions and
on any screen to directly go to the
apps on your device. Press
Home screen.
You can manage all apps and widgets on the Home screen. Swipe the
screen left or right to view all installed apps at a glance.
Home screen layout
You can view all apps and organise widgets and folders on the Home
screen.
Status bar
Weather widget
Google search
widget
Folder
Page icon
Quick access area
• The Home screen may vary, depending on the service provider or
software version.
Basic Functions
40
• Status bar: View status icons, the time and the battery level.
• Weather widget: View the information of weather and time for a
specific area.
• Google search widget: Perform a Google search by inputting spoken
or written keywords.
• Folder: Create folders to group apps by your preferences.
• Page icon: Display the total number of Home screen canvases. Tap the
desired page icon to go to the page you selected. The icon reflecting
the current canvas will be highlighted.
• Quick access area: Fix main apps at the bottom of the screen so that
they can be accessed from any Home screen canvas.
Status icons
When there is a notification for an unread message, calendar event or
alarm, the status bar displays the corresponding notification icon. Check
your device's status by viewing notification icons displayed on the status
bar.
No signal
Data is being transmitted over the network
Alarm is set
Vibrate mode is on
Bluetooth is on
Connected to a computer via USB
Battery level
Airplane mode is on
Missed calls
Wi-Fi is connected
Mute mode is on
GPS is on
Basic Functions
41
Hotspot is on
No SIM card
• Some of these icons may appear differently or may not appear at all,
depending on the device's status. Refer to the icons according to the
actual environment in which you are using the device.
• Displayed icons may vary, depending on the area or service provider.
Notifications panel
You can open the notifications panel by dragging the status bar
downward on the main screen.
• To open the quick access icons list, drag the notifications panel
downwards or tap .
• To rearrange, add, or remove icons, tap EDIT.
• If you touch and hold the icon, the settings screen for the
corresponding function appears.
Basic Functions
42
Switching the screen orientation
You can set the screen orientation to automatically switch according to
the device's physical orientation.
On the notification panel, tap Rotation from the quick access icon list.
Settings Display and activate AutoYou can also press
rotate screen.
Editing the Home screen
On the Home screen, touch and hold on an empty space, then select the
desired action from below.
• To rearrange the Home screen canvases, touch and hold on a canvas,
then drag it to another location.
• To add a widget to the Home screen, touch and hold on a blank area of
the Home screen, then select Widgets.
• To change a theme, touch and hold on a blank area of the Home
screen, then select Theme.
Settings Display Theme, then select
You can also press
a theme to apply to the device.
• To configure the Home screen settings, touch and hold on a blank area
of the Home screen, then select Home screen settings. See Home
screen settings for details.
• To view or reinstall the uninstalled apps, touch and hold on a blank area
of the Home screen, then select Uninstalled apps. See Uninstalled
apps for details.
Basic Functions
43
Viewing the background theme
You can view only the background image by hiding the apps and widgets
on the Home screen.
Spread two fingers apart on the Home screen.
• To return to the original screen, which displays apps and widgets, pinch
.
your fingers on the Home screen or press
Moving apps on the Home screen
On the Home screen, touch and hold an app, then drag it to another
location.
• To keep frequently used apps at the bottom of the Home screen, touch
and hold an app, then drag it to the quick access area at the bottom.
• To remove an icon from the quick access area, drag the icon to the
Home screen.
Basic Functions
44
Using folders from the Home screen
Creating folders
On the Home screen, touch and hold an app, then drag it over another
app.
• A new folder is created and the apps are added to the folder.
Editing folders
On the Home screen, tap a folder and do one of the following actions.
• To edit the folder name and colour, tap the folder name.
• To add apps, touch and hold an app, then drag it over the folder and
release it.
• To remove an app from the folder, touch and hold the app and drag it to
outside the folder. If the removed app is the only one app that existed
in the folder, the folder is removed automatically.
• You can also add or remove apps after tapping in the folder.
Home screen settings
You can customise Home screen settings.
Settings Display Home screen.
1 Press
2 Customise the following settings:
• Select Home: Select a Home screen mode.
• Wallpaper: Change the Home screen background wallpaper.
• Screen swipe effect: Select an effect to apply when the Home
screen canvas switches.
• Sort apps by: Set how apps are sorted on the Home screen.
• Grid: Change the app arrangement mode for the Home screen.
• Hide apps: Select which apps you want to hide from the Home
screen.
Basic Functions
45
Screen lock
Screen lock overview
Your device's screen turns off and locks itself if you press the Power/Lock
key. This also happens after the device is left idle for a specified period of
time.
If you press the Power/Lock key when a screen lock is not set, the Home
screen appears immediately.
To ensure security and prevent unwanted access to your device, set a
screen lock.
• Screen lock prevents unnecessary touch input on the device screen and
reduces battery consumption. We recommend that you activate the
screen lock while not using the device.
Setting a screen lock
There are several options available for configuring the screen lock settings.
1 Press
Settings Display Lock screen Select screen
lock and then select the method you prefer.
2 Customise the following settings:
• None: Deactivate the screen lock function.
• Swipe: Swipe on the screen to unlock the screen.
• Knock Code: Tap the spaces of the screen in a pattern to unlock the
screen.
• Pattern: Draw a pattern to unlock the screen.
• PIN: Enter a numeric password to unlock the screen.
• Password: Enter an alphanumeric password to unlock the screen.
• Fingerprints: Unlock the screen by using your fingerprint.
• If you incorrectly attempt to unlock the device 5 times, the screen is
blocked for 30 seconds.
Basic Functions
46
Secure start-up settings
When you select Knock Code, Pattern, PIN or Password as a screen lock
method, you can configure your device to be locked whenever turning on
the device in order to secure your data.
• You cannot use all functions, except for emergency calls until you
unlock the device.
• If you forget your decryption password, you cannot restore encrypted
data and personal information.
Lock screen settings
You can customise the following lock screen settings.
Settings Display Lock screen.
1 Press
Customise
the
following
settings:
2
• Select screen lock: Select a screen lock method.
• Smart Lock: Select trusted items so that if one of them occurs, the
device is automatically unlocked.
• Wallpaper: Change the lock screen background wallpaper.
• Clock: Select the display type of the clock to display on the locked
screen.
• Shortcuts: Add an app shortcut and directly access the app from
the lock screen by dragging the app shortcut on the screen.
• Screen swipe effect: Set screen transition effects to apply when
the screen is unlocked.
• Weather animation: Display weather animations for the current
location on the lock screen.
• Contact info for lost phone: Display emergency contact
information on the lock screen.
• Lock timer: Set the amount of idle time after which the device
automatically locks.
• Power key instantly locks: Instantly lock the screen when the
Power/Lock key is pressed.
Basic Functions
47
• Available setting items may vary, depending on the selected screen lock
method.
KnockON
You can turn the screen on or off by double-tapping the screen.
• This option is available only on the Home screen provided by LG. It may
not function properly on a custom launcher or on the Home screen
installed by the user.
• When tapping the screen, use your fingertip. Do not use a fingernail.
• To use the KnockON feature, make sure that the proximity/light sensor
is not blocked by a sticker or any other foreign substance.
Turning on the screen
Double-tap the middle of the screen.
• Tapping the top or bottom of the screen may decrease the recognition
rate.
Turning off the screen
Double-tap on an empty space on the Home screen and Lock screen.
You can also double-tap an empty space on the status bar.
Knock Code
You can unlock the screen by creating your own Knock Code. When the
screen is off, you can directly access the Home screen by tapping the
screen in a specified sequence.
• You can use your Knock Code together with the KnockOn feature.
• Make sure to use your fingertip when tapping the screen.
Basic Functions
48
Creating a Knock Code
Settings Display
1 Press
Lock screen Select screen
lock Knock Code.
2 Tap the squares in a pattern of your choice to create a Knock Code
and tap NEXT.
3 Input the created Knock Code again for verification, then tap
CONFIRM.
Unlocking the screen with a Knock Code
Unlock the screen by inputting the Knock Code you have created.
Input your Knock Code on the touch screen when the screen is turned off.
• It is also possible to enter a Knock Code when the lock screen is turned
on.
Memory card encryption
You can encrypt and protect data saved on the memory card. The
encrypted data in the memory card cannot be accessed from another
device.
1 Press
Settings General Fingerprints & security
Encrypt SD card.
2 Read the on-screen overview of memory card encryption and then tap
CONTINUE to continue.
3 Select an option and tap ENCRYPT NOW.
• New data encryption: Encrypt only data that is saved on the
memory card after encryption.
• Full encryption: Encrypt all the data currently saved on the memory
card.
• Exclude media files: Encrypt all files, except for media files such as
music, photos and videos.
Basic Functions
49
• To encrypt the memory card, make sure that a screen lock is set using a
PIN or password.
• Once memory card encryption starts, some functions are not available.
• If the device is turned off while encryption is underway, the encryption
process will fail, and some data may be damaged. Therefore, be sure to
check if the battery level is sufficient before starting encryption.
• Encrypted files are accessible only from the device where the files were
encrypted.
• The encrypted memory card cannot be used on another LG device. To
use the encrypted memory card on another mobile device, format the
card.
• You can activate memory card encryption even when no memory card
is installed into the device. Any memory card that is installed after
encryption will automatically be encrypted.
Taking screenshots
You can take screenshots of the current screen you are viewing.
Via a shortcut
Press and hold the Power/Lock key and the Volume Down (-) key at the
same time for at least two seconds.
• Screenshots can be viewed from the Screenshots folder in the
Gallery.
Via Capture+
On the screen where you want to take a screenshot, drag the status bar
downwards, then tap .
• When the screen is turned off or locked, you can access Capture+
by pressing the Volume Up (+) key twice. To use this feature, press
Settings General and turn on Shortcut keys.
• See Writing notes on a screenshot for details.
Basic Functions
50
Entering text
Using the Smart keyboard
You can use the Smart keyboard to enter and edit text.
With the Smart keyboard, you can view text as you type without
bothering to alternate between the screen and a conventional keyboard.
This allows you to easily find and correct errors when typing.
Moving the cursor
With the Smart keyboard, you can move the cursor to the exact position
you want. When typing text, touch and hold on the space bar and then
drag left or right.
• This option is available only on the QWERTY keyboard.
Basic Functions
51
Suggesting words
Smart keyboard automatically analyses your usage patterns to suggest
frequently used words as you type. The longer you use your device, the
more precise the suggestions are.
Enter text, then tap a suggested word or gently drag the left or right side
of the keyboard bar upwards.
• The selected word is automatically entered. You do not need to
manually type every letter of the word.
Changing the QWERTY keyboard layout
You can add, delete or rearrange keys on the bottom row of the keyboard.
1 Press
Settings General Language & keyboard LG
Keyboard Keyboard height and layout QWERTY keyboard
layout.
You can also tap on the keyboard and tap Keyboard height and
layout QWERTY keyboard layout.
2 Tap a key on the bottom row, then drag it to another position.
Basic Functions
52
• This option is available on the QWERTY, QWERTZ and AZERTY
keyboards.
• This function may not be supported for some languages.
Customising the keyboard height
You can customise the keyboard height to maximise hand comfort when
typing.
1 Press
Settings General Language & keyboard LG
Keyboard Keyboard height and layout Keyboard height.
You can also tap on the keyboard and tap Keyboard height and
layout Keyboard height.
2 Adjust the keyboard height.
Basic Functions
53
Selecting a landscape keyboard mode
You can select a landscape keyboard mode from several choices.
1 Press
Settings General Language & keyboard
LG Keyboard Keyboard height and layout Keyboard type in
landscape.
You can also tap on the keyboard and tap Keyboard height and
layout Keyboard type in landscape.
2 Select a keyboard mode.
Splitting the keyboard
You can split the keyboard in half and place each piece on either side of
the screen when the screen is in landscape mode.
Settings General Language & keyboard LG
Press
Keyboard Keyboard height and layout Split keyboard.
You can also tap on the keyboard and tap Keyboard height and
layout Split keyboard.
• Rotate the device to landscape mode to split the keyboard to both sides.
To merge or split the keyboard, pinch together or spread apart your
fingers on the keyboard.
Basic Functions
54
One-handed operation mode
You can move the keyboard to one side of the screen so that you can use
the keyboard with one hand.
1 Press
Settings General Language & keyboard LG
Keyboard Keyboard height and layout One-handed operation.
You can also tap on the keyboard and tap Keyboard height and
layout One-handed operation.
2 Press the arrow displayed next to the keyboard to move the keyboard
in the direction you want.
Entering text by using voice
On the keyboard, touch and hold
and then select .
• To maximise the voice command recognition, speak clearly.
• To enter text with your voice, make sure that your device is connected
to a network.
• To select the language for voice recognition, tap
Languages on the
voice recognition screen.
• This function may be not supported, or the supported languages may
differ depending on the service area.
Adding languages to the keyboard
You can make additional languages available for keyboard input.
1 Press
Settings General Language & keyboard LG
Keyboard Select languages.
2 Select the languages you want to make available.
Basic Functions
55
Copy and Paste
You can cut or copy text from an app, and then paste the text into the
same app. Or, you can run other apps and paste the text into them.
1 Touch and hold around the text you want to copy or cut.
2 Drag / to specify the area to copy or cut.
3 Select either CUT or COPY.
• Cut or copied text is automatically added to the clipboard.
4 Touch and hold the text input window, then select PASTE.
• If there is no item that has been copied or cut, the PASTE option will
not appear.
Clip Tray
If you copy or cut an image or text, it is automatically saved to the clip tray
and can be pasted to any space at any time.
1 On the keyboard, touch and hold
and select .
You can also touch and hold the text input window, then select CLIP
TRAY.
2 Select and paste an item from the clip tray.
• A maximum of 20 items can be saved to the clip tray.
• Tap to lock saved items in order not to delete them, even when
the maximum quantity is exceeded. A maximum of ten items can be
locked. To delete locked items, unlock them first.
• Tap to delete the items saved to the clip tray.
• The clip tray may not be supported by some downloaded apps.
Basic Functions
56
Content sharing
Playing content from another device
You can play photos, videos or songs saved on your device from a TV.
1 Connect the TV and your device to the same Wi-Fi network.
2 While viewing the items from the Gallery or Music app, tap
Play
on other device.
3 Select the TV you want to connect to.
• For use with Chromecast, Google Play services should be up to date.
Viewing content from nearby devices
You can view content from various devices, such as a computer, NAS or
mobile device, by using the Gallery or Music apps.
Connecting the devices
Connect both your device and another device that support DLNA function
to the same wireless network.
• Make sure that File sharing (DLNA) is activated on both the device and
the connected device.
Searching for nearby devices
You can view a list of DLNA devices on the same network by selecting the
Nearby devices menu in each app.
Use content from nearby devices as if you were using it on your device.
Basic Functions
57
Sending or receiving files
You can share files between your device and another LG device, or a tablet
or computer.
Sending files
From the Gallery, File Manager or Music app, tap
select a device on the file sharing list.
Share or
, then
Receiving files
Drag the status bar downward and tap , then tap File sharing.
If your device does not support the file sharing feature, press
Settings Networks Share & connect File sharing SmartShare
.
Beam
• Make sure that your device is connected to the same wireless network
as the file transfer target device.
• Make sure that File sharing is activated on both the device and the
target device.
Do not disturb
You can limit or mute notifications to avoid disturbances for a specific
period of time.
1 Press
and then tap
Settings Sound & notification Do not disturb
to activate it.
2 Tap Sounds and vibrations and select the mode you want:
• Priority only: Receive sound or vibrate notifications for the selected
apps. Even when Priority only is turned on, alarms still sound.
• Total silence: Disable both the sound and vibration.
Basic Functions
58
03
Useful Apps
Installing and uninstalling apps
Installing apps
Access an app store to search and download apps.
• You can use SmartWorld, Play Store or the app store provided by
your service provider.
• Some app stores may require you to create an account and sign in.
• Some apps may charge fees.
• If you use mobile data, you may be charged for data usage, depending
on your pricing plan.
• SmartWorld may not be supported depending on the area or service
provider.
Uninstalling apps
Uninstall apps that you no longer use from your device.
Uninstalling with the touch and hold gesture
On the Home screen, touch and hold the app to uninstall, then drag it over
Uninstall at the top of the screen.
You can also touch and hold the app, then tap an app or widget that is
attached to uninstall.
• If apps were uninstalled within 24 hours from now, you can reinstall
them. See Uninstalled apps for details.
Useful Apps
60
Uninstalling by using the settings menu
Press
Uninstall.
Settings General Apps, select an app, then tap
Uninstalling apps from the app store
To uninstall an app, access the app store from which you download the
app and uninstall it.
• Some apps cannot be uninstalled by users.
Uninstalled apps
You can view the uninstalled apps on the Home screen. You can also
reinstall apps which were uninstalled within 24 hours from now.
Uninstalled apps.
1 Press
Activate
the
desired
function:
2
• Reinstall: Reinstall the selected app.
• : Remove the uninstalled apps permanently from the device.
• Uninstalled apps are automatically removed from the device 24 hours
after they were uninstalled. If you want to reinstall the uninstalled apps,
you must download them again from the app store.
• This feature is activated on the default Home screen only. If you
uninstall apps while using the EasyHome screen or other launcher, they
are immediately and permanently removed from the device.
Useful Apps
61
Phone
Voice call
Make a phone call by using one of the available methods, such as manually
entering a phone number and making a call from the contact list or the
list of recent calls.
Making a call from the keypad
Dial.
1 Press
2 Make a call by using a method of your choice:
• Enter a phone number and tap .
• Touch and hold a speed dial number.
• Search for a contact by tapping the initial letter of a contact name
in the contact list, and then tap .
• To enter "+" when making an international call, touch and hold number
0.
• See Adding contacts for details on how to add phone numbers to the
speed dial list.
Making a call from the contact list
Contacts.
1 Press
From
the
contact
list,
select a contact and tap
2
Useful Apps
.
62
Answering a call
To answer a call, drag to the outside of the circle on the incoming call
screen.
• When the stereo headset is connected, you can make calls by using the
call/end button on the headset.
• To end a call simply by pressing the Power/Lock key, press
Settings Networks Call Common Answer and end calls, then
turn on End call with the Power key.
Rejecting a call
To reject an incoming call, drag across the incoming call screen.
• To send a rejection message, drag the rejection message option
across the screen.
• When a call is coming in, press the Volume Up (+), Volume Down (-) or
Power/Lock key to mute ringtone or vibration, or to hold the call.
Viewing missed calls
If there is a missed call, the status bar at the top of the screen displays .
To view missed call details, drag the status bar downwards. You can also
Call logs.
press
Useful Apps
63
Functions accessible during a call
During a call, you can access a variety of functions by tapping the onscreen buttons:
• Contacts: View the contact list during a call.
• End: End a call.
• Dialpad: Display or hide the dial pad.
• Speaker: Turn on the speakerphone function.
• Mute: Mute your voice so that your voice cannot be heard by the other
party.
• Bluetooth: Switch the call to a Bluetooth device that is paired and
connected.
• : Access additional call options.
• Available settings items may vary depending on the area or service
provider.
Making a three-way calling
You can make a call to another contact during a call.
1 During a call, tap Add call.
2 Enter a phone number and tap .
• The two calls are displayed on the screen at the same time, and the
first call is put on hold.
3 To start a conference call, tap Merge calls.
• You may be charged a fee for each call. Consult with your service
provider for more information.
Useful Apps
64
Viewing call records
To view recent call records, press
Call logs. Then, you can
use the following functions:
• To view detailed call records, select a contact. To make a call to the
selected contact, tap .
Delete.
• To delete call records, tap
• The displayed call duration may differ from the call charge. Consult with
your service provider for more information.
Configuring call options
You can configure various call options.
Dial or Call logs.
1 Press
Tap
Call
settings
and then configure the options to suit your
2
preferences.
Useful Apps
65
Messaging
Sending a message
You can create and send messages to your contacts using the Messaging
app.
• Sending messages abroad may incur additional charges. Consult with
your service provider for more information.
.
1 Press
2 Tap .
3 Specify a recipient and create a message.
.
• To attach files, tap
• To access optional menu items, tap .
4 Tap Send to send the message.
Reading a message
You can view exchanged messages organised by contact.
.
1 Press
2 Select a thread from the thread list.
Configuring messaging settings
You can change messaging settings to suit your preferences.
.
1 Press
2 Tap Settings from the message list.
Useful Apps
66
Camera
Starting the camera
You can take a photo or record a video to cherish all of your memorable
moments.
.
Press
• Before taking a photo or recording a video, wipe the camera lens with a
soft cloth.
• Be careful not to stain the camera lens with your fingers or other
foreign substance.
• If the battery level is lower than 5%, charge the battery before using
the camera.
• Images included in this user guide may be different from the actual
device.
• Photos and videos can be viewed or edited from the Gallery.
See Gallery overview for details.
You can take photos or record videos by selecting a variety of shooting
modes and options.
Turn the flash on
or off.
Switch between
front and rear
cameras.
Apply a film filter
effect.
Select a camera
mode.
Change the camera
options.
Useful Apps
Start the Gallery.
Record videos.
Take photos.
Back to the
previous screen.
67
Taking a photo
1 Tap the subject to focus the camera on.
2 Tap to take a photo.
• You can also press the Volume Down (-) or Volume Up (+) key to
take a photo.
• When the screen is turned off or locked, start the camera by pressing
the Volume Down (-) key twice. To activate this function, press
Settings General and turn on Shorcut keys.
Recording a video
1 Tap the subject to focus the camera on.
2 Tap .
• To take a photo while recording a video, tap .
• To pause the video recording, tap . To resume the video recording,
tap .
3 Tap
to end the video recording.
Customising the camera options
You can customise a variety of camera options to suit your preferences.
Tap on the screen.
• Available options vary depending on the selected camera (front or rear
camera) and the selected camera mode.
Photo size
Select values for aspect ratio and size for taking photos.
Video resolution
Select values for resolution and size for recording
videos.
Useful Apps
68
HDR
Obtain photos in vivid colours, and get compensated
effects even when they are taken against the light.
These functions are provided by the high dynamic range
(HDR) technology equipped in the camera of the device.
Timer
Set the timer to automatically take photos after a
specified period of time.
Cheese shutter
Take photos with voice commands.
Steady recording
Minimise motion blur while recording a video.
Tag locations
Save the image with GPS location data.
Grid
Display guide grids to so that you can take photos
or record videos based on the horizontal and vertical
reference lines.
Storage
Select any of Internal storage and SD card.
(Available when the memory card is inserted.)
Simple view
Hide all menus from the camera screen.
Help
Provide Help for each camera menu.
Additional options on the front camera
Selfie shot
Customise selfie shot settings.
• Gesture shot: Shoot using the Gesture shot feature.
• Auto shot: Shoot when the camera detects a face.
Save as flipped
Save as flipped images after taking selfies.
Useful Apps
69
Various camera modes
Panorama
You can create a panoramic photo by moving the camera in one direction
to photograph and stitch continuous shots of a wide view.
.
1 In the AUTO mode, tap MODE
Tap
and
then
slowly
move
the
camera
in one direction.
2
• Move the device by following the direction of the arrow in the
guideline.
3 Tap
to stop capturing the panoramic.
Useful Apps
70
Other useful features in the Camera app
Burst shot
You can take continuous shots of photos to create moving pictures.
On the camera screen, touch and hold .
• Continuous shots are taken at a fast speed while is held down.
• Up to thirty (30) continuous photos can be taken.
Simple view
Tap
Simple view to hide menus on the camera screen. Tap
display them.
to
AE/AF lock
You can fix the current exposure level and focus position by touching and
holding the screen on the camera screen. To turn off the feature, tap a
blank area on the screen.
Useful Apps
71
Switching between cameras
You can switch between the front and rear cameras to suit your
environment.
On the camera screen, tap or drag the screen in any direction to switch
between the front and rear cameras.
• Use the front camera to take selfies. See Selfie shot for details.
Zoom in or out
You can use zoom in or out on the camera screen while taking a photo or
recording a video.
• On the camera screen, pinch or spread two fingers to zoom in or out,
then use the displayed +/- slide bar.
• The zoom feature is not available when using the front camera in selfie
mode.
Useful Apps
72
Selfie shot
You can use the front camera to view your face on the screen and take
selfies.
Gesture shot
You can take selfies by using gestures.
Show your palm to the front camera and then clench your fist.
You can also clench your fist and then open it towards the front camera.
• In three seconds, a photo is taken.
• To use this feature, switch to the front camera mode, then tap
Selfie shot Gesture shot.
• Make sure that your palm and fist are within the reference line so that
the camera can detect them.
• This feature may not available while using some of the camera features.
Useful Apps
73
Auto shot
You can use the face detection feature to take selfies easily and
conveniently. You can set the device so that, when you look at the screen,
the front camera detects your face and takes a selfie automatically.
• The white coloured guide frame appears when the front camera
detects your face. If the subject within the guide frame stops moving,
the guide frame colour turns blue, then the camera takes a photo.
• Tap
Selfie shot Auto shot to enable the Auto shot feature.
Interval shot
You can take selfies at an interval.
While using the front camera, touch and hold . You can also show your
palm to the camera, then clench your fist twice quickly.
• Four photos are taken at about two seconds interval after a timer
delay of three seconds.
Useful Apps
74
Gesture view
After taking a selfie with the front camera, you can preview the selfie
immediately by placing the screen close to your face.
• Tap
Gesture view to enable the Gesture view feature.
• Only one preview is available each time a photo is taken.
• If you rotate the device while in preview screen, the screen switches to
camera mode.
Save as flipped
Before taking a photo with the front camera, tap
The image is flipped horizontally.
Save as flipped.
• When using the front camera, you can change how selfies are taken in
the camera options. See Customising the camera options for details.
Useful Apps
75
Gallery
Gallery overview
You can view and manage photos and videos saved on your device.
1 Press
.
• Saved photos and videos are displayed by folder.
2 Tap a folder and select a file.
• View the selected file in full-screen mode.
• While viewing a photo, swipe left or right to view the previous or
next photo.
• While viewing a video, swipe left or right to rewind or fast-forward
the video.
• Some file formats may not be supported, depending on the installed
software.
• Some files may not be opened due to encoding.
• Files that exceed the size limit may cause an error.
Viewing photos
Back to the previous
screen.
Add to or remove
from your favourites.
Access additional
options.
Delete images.
Share images.
Start the camera.
Edit images.
• To display the menu items, gently tap the screen. To hide the menu
items, tap the screen again.
Useful Apps
76
Editing photos
1 While viewing a photo, tap .
2 Use a variety of effects and tools to edit the photo.
3 Tap SAVE to save changes.
• The changes are overwritten to the original file.
Save copy.
• To save the edited photo as another file, tap
Playing a video
Edit the video.
Add to or remove
from your
favourites.
Access additional
options.
Open with QSlide.
Adjust the sound
volume.
Lock or unlock
the screen.
Rewind the video.
Fast-forward the
video.
Pause or play the
video.
• To adjust the sound volume, drag the right side of the video screen up
or down.
• To adjust the screen brightness, drag the left side of the video screen
up or down.
Useful Apps
77
Deleting files
You can delete files by using one of the following options:
• Touch and hold a file from the file list, then tap Delete.
• Tap from the file list and delete the desired files.
• Deleted files are automatically moved to Trash and they can be
restored to the Gallery within 7 days.
Trash. Tap to completely delete the files. In
• On the Gallery, tap
this case, the files cannot be restored.
Sharing files
You can share files by using one of the following options:
• While viewing a photo or video, tap to share the file by using the
method you want.
• Tap from the file list to select files and share them using the method
you want.
Useful Apps
78
Music
You can play and manage songs or music albums.
LG Music.
1 Press
2 Select a category.
3 Select a music file.
Switch to the playlist.
Back to the previous screen.
Search for music files.
Access additional options.
Add or delete favourites.
Play in random order.
Adjust the sound volume.
Tap to play from the beginning
of the current file / Double-tap
to play the previous file / Touch
and hold to rewind.
Select a repeat mode.
Set sound effects.
Tap to play the next file / Touch
and hold to fast forward.
Pause or play.
• Some file formats may not be supported, depending on the installed
software.
• Files that exceed the size limit may cause an error.
• Music files may be protected by international copyright owners or
copyright laws. You may have to obtain legal permission before copying
a music file. To download or copy a music file, first check the copyright
law for the relevant country.
• This model supports Hi-Fi audio playback. Hi-Fi audio files display the
Hi-Fi icon.
Useful Apps
79
E-mail
Email overview
You can register an email account to your device and then you can check
and send emails from your device.
• If you use mobile data, you may be charged for data usage depending
on your pricing plan. Consult with your service provider for more
information.
Registering email accounts
When you use the email app for the first time, register your email account.
E-mail.
1 Press
Select
an
email
service
provider.
2
3 Enter your email address and password and then tap NEXT to register
your account.
• To manually register an email account, tap MANUAL SETUP.
Managing email accounts
To view or edit your email account settings, tap
Settings.
• To add an account, tap Add account.
Remove account.
• To delete an account, tap
Opening another email account
If several email accounts are registered and you want to view another
account, tap and select another one from the account list.
Useful Apps
80
Checking email
1 Tap and select a mail box.
2 Select an email from the email list.
• The email message appears.
Sending email
1 Tap .
2 Enter the recipient’s email address.
3 Enter a subject and message.
.
• To attach files, tap
• To access optional menu items, tap .
4 Tap
to send the email.
Calendar
Calendar overview
You can use the calendar to manage events and tasks.
Adding events
Calendar.
1 Press
2 Select a date and then tap .
3 Enter event details and tap SAVE.
• If you tap a date from the calendar and the date contains events, a
pop-up window appears showing a list of the events. Tap an event
from the pop-up window to view the event details.
Useful Apps
81
Syncing events
Tap
Calendars to sync, and select a calendar to sync.
• When your events are saved from the device to your Google account,
they are automatically synced with the Google calendar, too. Then, you
can sync other devices with the Google calendar in order to make those
devices have the same events that your device has and to manage your
events on those devices.
Event pocket
You can use the event pocket to create events.
Tap to open the event pocket and then drag content to a date in the
calendar.
: Manage images, text, memos and temporarily saved events. You
•
can also share text, images and memos from another app and save
them to the pocket. If you tap POCKET when creating an event, the
event is temporarily saved to the pocket.
: Manage tasks that have no deadline, such as events.
•
Calculator
You can use two types of calculators: the simple calculator and the
scientific calculator.
Calculator.
1 Press
2 Use the keypad to make a calculation.
• To use scientific calculator, drag the green coloured slide bar located
in the right side of the screen to the left.
• To restart a calculation, touch and hold the DEL button.
Useful Apps
82
Clock
Alarm
You can set an alarm to trigger it at a specified time.
Clock Alarm.
1 Press
Tap
to
add
a
new
alarm.
2
3 Configure the alarm settings and tap SAVE.
• If you select a previously set alarm, you can edit the alarm.
• To delete an alarm, tap at the top of the screen. You can also touch
and hold the alarm.
World clock
You can view the current time in cities around the world.
Clock World clock.
1 Press
2 Tap and add a city.
Timer
You can set the timer to trigger an alarm after a specified period of time.
Clock Timer.
1 Press
Set
the
time
and
tap Start.
2
• To pause the timer, tap Pause. To resume the timer, tap Resume.
• To reset the timer settings, tap Reset.
3 Tap Stop to stop the timer alarm.
Useful Apps
83
Stopwatch
You can use the stopwatch to record a lap time.
Clock Stopwatch.
1 Press
2 Tap Start to initiate the stopwatch.
• To record a lap time, tap Lap.
3 Tap Pause to pause the stopwatch.
• To resume the stopwatch, tap Resume.
• To clear all the records and restart the stopwatch, tap Reset.
Downloads
You can view, delete or share files downloaded via the Internet or apps.
Tools Downloads.
Press
File Manager
You can view and manage files saved on your device or cloud.
Tools File Manager.
1 Press
2 Tap and select the desired storage location.
Useful Apps
84
Voice Recorder
You can record and save your voice or others’ voices from important
events. Recorded voice files can be played back or shared.
1 Press
2 Tap .
Tools Voice Recorder.
• To pause recording, tap .
• To save the location details of recording, tap Location.
• To sync and save the event duration details which you added in
Calendar, tap Event.
3 Tap
to end recording.
• The file is saved automatically and the pre-listen screen appears.
4 Tap
to play the recorded voice.
• If you tap , recorded voice files appear. You can play a recorded
voice file from the list.
FM Radio
You can listen to FM radio.
Tools FM Radio.
Press
• To use this app, first connect earphones to the device. The earphones
function as the radio antenna.
• This function may not be supported depending on the area.
LG Health
LG Health overview
You can manage your health and maintain good exercise habits by
keeping track of the exercises you do.
Useful Apps
85
Getting started with LG Health
You can configure LG Health when launching the app for the first time or
after resetting it.
LG LG Health.
1 Press
2 Follow the on-screen instructions to complete configuration.
Using LG Health
You can view main information on LG Health and manage the amount of
physical exercise and health information.
LG LG Health.
1 Press
2 The following options are available.
•
•
: View your exercise log on the day you want to check.
: Begin tracking an exercise. The route and amount of your
physical exercise are recorded for each exercise type.
• : Set your daily exercise goals including calories and steps, or set
various LG Health settings.
Useful Apps
86
• Health-related information provided by LG Health is designed for user
convenience and cannot be used for purposes of disease prevention,
treatment, diagnosis or other medical issues.
• LG Health may vary or may not be available, depending on the country
and service provider. LG Health functions that are available and apps
that can be added to LG Health may vary, depending on the country. This
is due to differing laws and regulations.
Contacts
Contacts overview
You can save and manage contacts.
LG Contacts.
Press
Adding contacts
Adding new contacts
1 On the contact list screen, tap .
2 Enter contact details and tap SAVE.
Importing contacts
You can import contacts from another storage device.
1 On the contact list screen, tap Manage contacts Import.
2 Select the source and target locations of the contact you want to
import, and then tap OK.
3 Select the contacts and tap IMPORT.
Useful Apps
87
Adding contacts to the speed dial list
1 On the contact list screen, tap Speed dial.
2 Tap Add contact from a speed dial number.
3 Select a contact.
Searching for contacts
You can search for contacts by using one of the following options:
• On the contact list screen, enter a contact name in the search box.
• Scroll the contact list up or down.
• From the index of the contact list screen, tap the initial letter of a
contact.
Contacts list
Editing contacts
1 On the contact list screen, select a contact.
2 On the contact detail screen, tap and edit details.
3 Tap SAVE to save changes.
Deleting contacts
You can delete contacts by using one of the following options:
• On the contact list screen, touch and hold a contact you want to
delete, then tap Delete contact.
Delete on the contact list screen.
• Tap
Adding favourites
You can register frequently used contacts as favourites.
1 On the contact list screen, select a contact.
2 On the contact detail screen, tap .
Useful Apps
88
Creating groups
New group.
1 On the contact list screen, tap Groups
2 Enter a new group name.
3 Tap Add members, select contacts, then tap ADD.
4 Tap SAVE to save the new group.
Tasks
You can register tasks to your device to easily manage schedules.
LG Tasks.
1 Press
2 Tap to add a task.
3 Enter task details and then tap SAVE.
LG Backup
You can back up, restore and move the data saved on your device.
1 Press
Management LG Backup.
You can also press
Settings General Backup & reset
LG Backup.
2 Follow the on-screen instructions to select whether to back up data
in the preset backup folder on the device or to copy data to other
devices.
• Resetting your device may delete backup files saved in internal storage.
To minimise data loss, copy important backup files from the LG Backup
folder in the internal storage to a computer or external storage.
Useful Apps
89
• Data in a Google account will not be backed up. When you synchronise
your Google account, Google apps, Google contacts, Google calendar,
Google memo app data and apps downloaded from Play store are
stored on the Drive app automatically.
• Backup files are saved with the file extension *.lbf under the LG Backup
folder on the memory card or internal storage.
• Fully charge the battery before backing up or restoring data to avoid
unintentional powering off during the process.
RemoteCall Service
Your device can be remotely diagnosed for resolving issues. First, make a
phone call to an LG Customer Service Centre as follows:
• To use this function, first you must agree to usage of the function.
• If you use mobile data, you may be charged for data usage depending
on your pricing plan.
RemoteCall Service.
1 Press
2 Connect a call to an LG Customer Service Centre.
3 After the call connects, follow the service associate’s instructions to
enter a six-digit access number.
• Your device is remotely connected and the remote support service
starts.
Chrome
Sign in to Chrome and import opened tabs, bookmarks and address bar
data from a computer to your device.
Useful Apps
90
Google apps
You can use Google apps by setting a Google account. The Google account
registration window appears automatically when you use a Google app for
the first time. If you do not have a Google account, create one from your
device. For details on how to use an app, see the Help in the app.
• Some apps may not work depending on the area or service provider.
Docs
Create documents or edit documents created online or from another
device. Share and edit documents together with others.
Drive
Upload, save, open, share and organise files from your device. Files
accessible from apps can be accessed from anywhere, including online and
offline environments.
Gmail
Register your Google email account to your device to check or send email.
Google
Use the Google to search for web pages, images, news and more by
entering or speaking keywords.
Maps
Find your location or the location of a place on the map. View geographical
information.
Photos
View or share photos or albums saved on your device.
Useful Apps
91
Play Movies & TV
Use your Google account to rent or purchase movies. Purchase content
and play it anywhere.
Play Music
Purchase music files from the Play Store. Play music files saved on your
device.
Sheets
Create spreadsheets or edit spreadsheets created online or from another
device. Share and edit spreadsheets together with others.
Slides
Create presentation material or edit presentation material created online
or from another device. Share and edit presentation material together
with others.
YouTube
Search and play videos. Upload videos on YouTube to share them with
people around the world.
Useful Apps
92
04
Settings
Settings
You can customise the device settings in accordance with your
preferences.
Settings.
Press
• Tap and enter a keyword in the search box to access a setting item.
• Tap to change the view mode. This user guide assumes that you are
using the Tab view.
Networks
Dual SIM card
You can configure Dual SIM card settings.
1 On the settings screen, tap Networks Dual SIM card.
2 Customise the following functions:
• SIM card 1: Change the name and icon of the SIM card 1.
• SIM card 2: Change the name and icon of the SIM card 2.
• SIM card colour theme: Change the colour themes for the SIM
cards.
• Cost save mode: Activate or deactivate the cost save mode. In the
cost save mode, if you make a call to a contact to which a specific
SIM card is assigned, this SIM card is used for the call even if the
other SIM card is active, for example, it is using mobile data.
• Mobile data: Select a SIM card you want to use for mobile data
service. You can also turn off this function.
• Data roaming: Select this option to enable the device to use mobile
data when you are roaming outside your local network area.
Settings
94
Wi-Fi
You can connect to nearby devices over a Wi-Fi network.
Connecting to a Wi-Fi network
1 On the settings screen, tap Networks
to activate it.
2 Tap
Wi-Fi.
• Available Wi-Fi networks appear automatically.
3 Select a network.
• You may need to enter the network's Wi-Fi password.
• The device skips this process for previously accessed Wi-Fi
networks. If you do not want to automatically connect to a certain
Wi-Fi network, touch and hold the network and then tap Forget
network.
Wi-Fi network settings
On the settings screen, tap Networks Wi-Fi.
• Switch to mobile data: If the mobile data connection function is
activated but the device cannot connect to the Internet via Wi-Fi
connection, the device automatically connects to the Internet via the
mobile data connection.
• : Customise Wi-Fi network settings.
Settings
95
Wi-Fi Direct
You can connect your device to other devices that support Wi-Fi Direct to
share data directly with them. You do not need an access point. You can
connect with more than two devices by using Wi-Fi Direct.
1 On the settings screen, tap Networks Wi-Fi
Advanced Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi Direct.
• Nearby devices that support Wi-Fi Direct automatically appear.
2 Select a device.
• Connection occurs when the device accepts the connection request.
• The battery may drain faster when using Wi-Fi Direct.
Settings
96
Bluetooth
You can connect your device to nearby devices that support Bluetooth to
exchange data with them. Connect your device to a Bluetooth headset
and a keyboard. This makes it easier to control the device.
Pairing with another device
1 On the settings screen, tap Networks
to activate it.
2 Tap
Bluetooth.
• Available devices appear automatically.
• To refresh the device list, tap SEARCH.
• Only devices set as visible are displayed on the list.
3 Select a device from the list.
4 Follow the on-screen instructions to perform authentication.
• This step is skipped for previously accessed devices.
Sending data via Bluetooth
1 Select a file.
• You can send multimedia files or contacts.
Bluetooth.
2 Tap
3 Select a target device for the file.
• The file is sent as soon as the target device accepts it.
• File sharing processes may differ, depending on the file.
Settings
97
Mobile data
You can turn on or off mobile data. You can also manage mobile data
usage.
Turning on mobile data
1 On the settings screen, tap Networks
to activate it.
2 Tap
Mobile data.
Customising mobile data settings
1 On the settings screen, tap Networks Mobile data.
2 Customise the following settings:
• Mobile data: Set to use data connections on mobile networks.
• Limit mobile data usage: Set a limit for mobile data usage to block
mobile data if the limit is reached.
• : Customise mobile data settings.
Call
You can customise call settings, such as voice call and international call
options.
• Some features may not be supported depending on the area or service
provider.
1 On the settings screen, tap Networks Call.
2 Customise the settings.
Settings
98
Share & connect
NFC
You can use the device as a transportation card or credit card. You can also
share data with the other device.
1 On the setting screen, tap Networks Share & connect NFC.
to activate it.
2 Tap
• Touch your device with other device that supports NFC to allow
sharing data.
• NFC antenna may be located differently depending on the device type.
See Parts overview for details about the NFC antenna area.
Android Beam
You can share files by touching the back of the device to other device. You
can also share files including music, videos or contacts and open a web
page or launch an app from the other device.
1 On the settings screen, tap Networks Share & connect Android
Beam.
2 Touch the back of the device with another device.
• NFC antenna may be located differently depending on the device type.
Settings
99
File sharing
You can send and receive files between your device and other LG devices
or tablets.
• See Sending or receiving files for details.
1 On the settings screen, tap Networks Share & connect File
sharing.
2 Customise the following settings:
• LG X venture: Change the device name.
• Save to: Set the destination folder to save files sent from other
devices in.
• File sharing: Permit receipt of files sent from other devices.
• SmartShare Beam: Share files with other devices via SmartShare
Beam.
• Help: You can view help on sharing files.
Media server
You can share media content on your device with nearby devices that
support DLNA.
1 On the settings screen, tap Networks Share & connect Media
server.
2 Customise the following settings:
• Content sharing: Share content on your device with nearby devices.
• LG X venture: Set your device’s name.
• Content to share: Select the type of media content to share with
other devices.
• Allowed devices: View a list of devices permitted to access content
on your device.
• Not-allowed devices: View a list of devices not permitted to access
content on your device.
Settings
100
LG AirDrive
You can use your LG account to manage files saved on the device from a
computer. You do not need a USB connection.
1 On the settings screen, tap Networks Share & connect LG
AirDrive.
2 Use a single LG account to sign in to LG Bridge on the computer and
LG AirDrive on the device.
• LG Bridge software can be downloaded from www.lg.com.
3 Manage files on the device from the computer.
Printing
You can connect your device to a Bluetooth printer and print photos or
documents saved on the device.
1 On the settings screen, tap Networks Share & connect Printing.
• If the desired printer is not in the list, install the printer driver from the
app store.
to activate it.
2 Tap
Select
a
printer
from the printer list screen.
3
Add printer.
• To add a printer, tap
Search.
• To search for a printer name, tap
Settings from the printer list screen.
• Tap
4 Select a file and tap
Print.
• The document prints.
• If you do not have a Google account, tap ADD ACCOUNT to create an
account.
Settings
101
Tethering
USB tethering
You can connect the device to another device via USB and share mobile
data.
1 Connect your device and other devices via USB cable.
2 On the settings screen, tap Networks Tethering USB tethering
and then drag
to activate it.
• This option uses mobile data and may incur data usage fees, depending
on your pricing plan. Consult with your service provider for more
information.
• When connecting to a computer, download the USB driver from
www.lg.com and install it on the computer.
• You cannot send or receive files between your device and a computer
while USB tethering is turned on. Turn off USB tethering to send or
receive files.
• Operating systems that support tethering are Window XP or higher, or
Linux.
Settings
102
Wi-Fi hotspot
You can set the device as a wireless router so that other devices can
connect to the Internet by using your device's mobile data.
1 On the settings screen, tap Networks Tethering Wi-Fi hotspot
and then drag
to activate it.
2 Tap Set up Wi-Fi hotspot, and enter the Wi-Fi name (SSID) and
password.
3 Turn on Wi-Fi on the other device, and select the name of the device
network on the Wi-Fi list.
4 Enter the network password.
• This option uses mobile data and may incur data usage fees, depending
on your pricing plan. Consult with your service provider for more
information.
• More information is available at this web site:
http://www.android.com/tether#wifi
Settings
103
Bluetooth tethering
A Bluetooth-connected device can connect to the Internet by using your
device's mobile data.
1 On the settings screen, tap Networks Tethering Bluetooth
tethering and then drag
to activate it.
2 Turn on Bluetooth on both devices, and pair them.
• This option uses mobile data and may incur data usage fees, depending
on your pricing plan. Consult with your service provider for more
information.
• More information is available at this web site:
http://www.android.com/tether#Bluetooth_tethering
Help
You can view help on using tethering and hotspots.
On the settings screen, tap Networks Tethering Help.
Settings
104
More
Airplane mode
You can turn off the call and mobile data functions. When this mode is
on, functions that do not involve data, such as games and music playback,
remain available.
1 On the settings screen, tap Networks More Airplane mode.
2 Tap TURN ON in the confirmation screen.
Mobile networks
You can customise mobile data settings.
1 On the settings screen, tap Networks More Mobile networks.
2 Customise the following settings:
• Network mode: Select a network type.
• Access Point Names: View or change the access point for using
mobile data services. To change the access point, select a choice
from the access point list.
• Network operators: Search for network operators and connect
automatically to a network.
VPN
You can connect to a safe virtual network, such as an intranet. You can
also manage connected virtual private networks.
Adding VPN
1 On the settings screen, tap Networks More VPN.
• Be cautious that if the screen lock is unlocked, all VPN information
saved on the device are erased.
Settings
105
2 Tap Add VPN.
• This feature is available only when the screen lock is activated. If the
screen lock is deactivated, a notification screen appears. Tap SETTINGS
from the notification screen to activate the screen lock. See Setting a
screen lock for details.
3 Enter VPN details and tap SAVE.
Configuring VPN settings
1 Tap a VPN from the VPNS list.
2 Enter the VPN user account details and tap CONNECT.
• To save the account details, select the Save account information
checkbox.
Sound & notification
You can customise sound, vibrate and notification settings.
On the settings screen, tap Sound & notification and customise the
following settings:
• Sound profile: Change the sound mode to Sound, Vibrate only, or
Silent.
• Volume: Adjust the sound volume for various items.
• SIM1 ringtone/SIM2 ringtone: Select a ringtone for incoming calls.
Add or delete ringtones.
• Ringtone ID: Create a ringtone for an incoming call from a particular
contact.
• Sound with vibration: Set the device to vibrate and play a ringtone
simultaneously.
• SIM1 vibration type/SIM2 vibration type: You can select a vibration
type or make your own vibration pattern.
Settings
106
• Do not disturb: Set the time, range and app type to receive
notification messages. Receive notification messages only on particular
days of the week.
• Lock screen: Display or hide a notification message on the lock screen.
You can also hide private information.
• Apps: Select the apps that can show their notification messages on
the screen, and set the priorities of those apps in regard to notification
messages.
• Notification LED: Indicate device status via LED.
• More SIM1 notification sound/SIM2 notification sound: Select a
notification ringtone. Set music saved on the device as a notification
ringtone.
• More Sound effects: Select a sound effect to play when you tap the
dialpad or keyboard, select an option, or lock or unlock the screen.
• More Message/call voice notifications: Set the device to read the
caller information or message content via voice.
Display
You can customise detailed settings for each screen type.
On the settings screen, tap Display and customise the following settings:
• Home screen: Customise settings for the Home screen. See Home
screen settings for details.
• Lock screen: Customise lock screen settings. See Lock screen settings
for details.
• Theme: Select a screen theme for your device.
• Font type: Change the font face.
• Font size: Change the font size.
• Bold text: Bold the text on the screen.
Settings
107
• Brightness: Use the slide bar to change the device's screen brightness.
To automatically adjust screen brightness according to ambient light
intensity, tap the Auto switch.
• Auto: Set the device so that the screen brightness is automatically
adjusted in accordance with the ambient light intensity.
• Comfort view: Set the device to reduce amount of blue light on screen
to reduce eye strain.
• Auto-rotate screen: Automatically rotate the screen according to the
device's orientation.
• Screen timeout: Automatically turn off the screen when the device is
left idle for a specified period of time.
• More Display size: Zoom in or out the screen.
• More KnockON: Turn on or off the screen by tapping the screen
twice.
• More Screen saver: Display a screen saver when the device is
connected to the holder or charger. Select a screen saver type to
display.
• More Motion sensor calibration: Correct the angle and speed of the
motion sensor to improve the tilt accuracy and speed of the sensor.
• When correcting the motion sensor, make sure to place the device on a
flat surface. Failure to do so may cause an error with the motion sensor
functions, such as automatic screen rotation.
Settings
108
General
Language & keyboard
You can customise language and keyboard settings for your device.
1 On the settings screen, tap General Language & keyboard.
2 Customise the following settings:
• Language: Select a language to apply for the device.
• Current keyboard: View the keyboard currently in use. Select a
keyboard to use when entering text.
• LG Keyboard: Customise the LG keyboard settings.
• Google voice typing: Configure the options for text dictation by
Google.
• Text-to-speech output: Configure the settings for text-to-speech
output.
• Pointer speed: Adjust the pointer speed of a mouse or trackpad.
• Reverse buttons: Reverse the right mouse button to perform
primary direct-manipulation actions.
Location
You can customise how your location information is used by particular
apps.
1 On the settings screen, tap General Location.
2 Customise the following settings:
• Mode: Select a method to provide your location information.
• RECENT LOCATION REQUEST: View apps that recently requested
location information.
• Low power location estimation: Estimate the device location by
using low power consumption.
• Google Location History: Configure the Google location history
settings.
Settings
109
Accounts & sync
You can add or manage accounts, including a Google account. You can also
sync particular apps or user information automatically.
1 On the settings screen, tap General Accounts & sync.
2 Customise the following settings:
• Auto-sync data: Sync all the registered accounts automatically.
• ACCOUNTS: View a list of registered accounts. To view or change
details of an account, tap the account.
• ADD ACCOUNT: Add accounts.
Accessibility
You can manage accessibility plug-ins installed on your device.
1 On the settings screen, tap General Accessibility.
2 Customise the following settings:
• Vision TalkBack: Set the device to notify screen status or actions
via voice.
• Vision Message/call voice notifications: Set the device to read
the caller information or message content via voice.
• Vision Font size: Change the font size.
• Vision Bold text: Bold the text on the screen.
• Vision Display size: Zoom in or out the screen.
• Vision Touch zoom: Zoom in or out by tapping the screen three
times.
• Vision Window zoom: Magnify or reverse a part of the screen.
• Vision Large mouse pointer: Magnify the mouse pointer.
• Vision High contrast screen: Turn the background colour into
black for a high contrast screen.
• Vision Screen colour inversion: Increase the display colour
contrast for people with low vision.
• Vision Screen colour adjustment: Adjust the display colour.
Settings
110
• Vision Grayscale: Switch the screen to grayscale mode.
• Vision End call with the Power key: End a call by pressing the
Power/Lock key.
• Vision Answer call with the Home key: Answer a call by pressing
the home key.
• Hearing Captions: Turn on the subtitle service when playing
videos for the hearing impaired.
• Hearing Notification LED: Indicate device status via LED.
• Hearing Flash alerts: Set the device to notify you with a blinking
light for incoming calls, messages and alarms.
• Hearing Turn off all sounds: Mute all sounds and lower volume
on the receiver.
• Hearing Audio type: Select the audio type.
• Hearing Sound balance: Adjust the audio output balance. Use the
slide bar to change the balance.
• Motor & cognition Touch assistant: Turn on the touch board to
make buttons and gestures easier to use.
• Motor & cognition Touch input: Enter text by touching and
holding the screen or modify it by simply touching the screen.
• Motor & cognition Physical keyboard: Customise the keyboard
settings.
• Motor & cognition Auto mouse click: Automatically click the
mouse pointer in case of no movement.
• Motor & cognition Touch and hold for calls: Answer or decline
calls by touching and holding the call button instead of dragging it.
• Motor & cognition Screen timeout: Turn off the screen
automatically when the device is left idle for a specified period of
time.
• Motor & cognition Touch control areas: Limit the touch area
so that only a particular portion of the screen can be controlled by
touch input.
Settings
111
• Accessibility features shortcut: Quickly access a frequently used
three times.
function by press
• Auto-rotate screen: Automatically change the screen orientation
according to the physical position of the device.
• Switch Access: Create key combinations to control your device.
QuickButton
You can use the hot key to directly launch apps, or turn a feature on or off.
On the settings screen, tap General QuickButton.
• See QuickButton for details.
Shortcut keys
You can use the volume keys to directly launch apps when the screen is
turned off or locked.
1 On the settings screen, tap General Shortcut keys.
to activate it.
2 Tap
• Capture+: Press the Volume Up key twice.
• Camera: Press the Volume Down key twice.
Google services
You can use Google settings to manage your Google apps and account
settings.
On the settings screen, tap General Google services.
Settings
112
Fingerprints & security
1 On the settings screen, tap General Fingerprints & security.
2 Customise the following settings:
• Fingerprints: Use your fingerprint to unlock the screen or content.
See Fingerprint recognition overview for details.
• Content lock: Set the method to lock files in the Gallery or
QuickMemo+.
• Encrypt SD card: Encrypt the memory card to prevent use on
another device. See Memory card encryption for details.
• Secure start-up: Protect your device with a lock when it powers on.
See Secure start-up settings for details.
• Set up SIM card lock: Lock or unlock the USIM card, or change the
password (PIN).
• Password typing visible: Display a password as you enter it.
• Phone administrators: Allow privileges to restrict the control or
use of the device to particular apps.
• Unknown sources: Allow the installation of apps from non-Play
Store apps.
• Credential protection: View the type of the storage where the
security certificate will be saved.
• Certificate management: Manage the security certificate saved on
the device.
• Trust agents: View and use trust agents installed on the device.
• Screen pin: Fix the app screen so that only the currently active app
can be used.
• Usage access: View details on usage of apps on the device.
Settings
113
Date & time
You can customise date and time settings for your device.
1 On the settings screen, tap General Date & time.
2 Customise the settings.
Storage
You can view and manage internal storage on the device or storage space
of the memory card.
1 On the settings screen, tap General Storage.
2 Customise the following settings:
• DEVICE STORAGE: View the total storage space and free space
in the device’s internal storage. View a list of apps in use and the
storage capacity for each app.
• PORTABLE STORAGE: View the total storage space and free space
in the memory card. This option appears only when a memory card
is inserted. To unmount the memory card, tap .
Battery & power saving
You can view the current battery information or turn on power-saving
mode.
1 On the settings screen, tap General Battery & power saving.
2 Customise the following settings:
• Battery usage: View the battery usage details. To view more details,
select a specific item.
• Battery percentage on status bar: Display the remaining battery
level as a percentage on the status bar.
• Battery saver: Reduce battery consumption by cutting down some
device settings, such as the display brightness, speed and vibration
intensity. The status bar displays when power-saving mode is on.
Settings
114
Memory
You can view the average amount of memory usage over a certain period
of time and the memory occupied by an app.
1 On the settings screen, tap General Memory.
2 Tap to set a time slot to retrieve data.
Apps
You can view a list of installed apps. Stop apps from running or delete
apps, if necessary.
1 On the settings screen, tap General Apps.
2 Select an app and perform actions.
Tap & pay
You can make payments with your device instead of a credit card.
On the settings screen, tap General Tap & pay.
Backup & reset
You can back up data saved on your device to another device or account.
Reset the device, if necessary.
1 On the settings screen, tap General Backup & reset.
2 Customise the following settings:
• LG Backup: Back up or restore the blocked sender list, messages,
images, home screens and other data saved on the device. See LG
Backup for details.
• Back up my data: Back up your app data, Wi-Fi password and other
settings to the Google server.
• Backup account: View the current backup account in use.
• Automatic restore: Automatically restore backup settings and data
when reinstalling an app.
Settings
115
• Network settings reset: Reset Wi-Fi, Bluetooth and other network
settings.
• Factory data reset: Reset all settings for the device and delete data.
• Resetting your device deletes all data on it. Enter your device name,
Google account and other initial information again.
About phone
You can view information about your device, such as the name, status,
software details and legal information.
On the settings screen, tap General About phone and view information.
Regulatory & Safety
You can view regulatory marks and related information on your device.
On the settings screen, tap General Regulatory & Safety.
Settings
116
05
Appendix
LG Language Settings
Select a language to use on your device.
Settings General Language & keyboard
• Press
Language ADD LANGUAGE, and select a language.
- Touch and hold and drag it to the top of the language list to set it
as a default language.
LG Bridge
LG Bridge overview
LG Bridge is an app that helps you manage the photos, music, videos
and documents saved on your LG smartphone from your computer
conveniently. You can back up contacts, photos and more to the computer
or update the device software.
• See LG Bridge help for details.
• The supported features may vary depending on the device.
• LG USB driver is a necessary program to connect your LG smartphone
with the computer and is installed when you install LG Bridge.
LG Bridge functions
• Manage the files on the device from a computer via Wi-Fi connection
or mobile data connection.
• Back up data from the device to a computer or restore data from a
computer to the device via USB cable connection.
• Update the device software from a computer via USB cable connection.
Appendix
118
Installing LG Bridge on a computer
1
2
3
4
Go to www.lge.com from your computer.
Select your region.
Click Support Software & Firmware.
Enter the name of your device.
OR
Select by the Product Category.
5 Go to PC Sync LG Bridge to download the setup file.
• Go to Details to view the minimum requirements for installing LG
Bridge.
Phone software update
LG Mobile phone software update from the
Internet
For more information about using this function, please visit
http://www.lg.com/common/index.jsp, select your country and language.
This feature allows you to conveniently update the firmware on your
phone to a newer version from the Internet without needing to visit a
service centre. This feature will only be available if and when LG makes a
newer firmware version available for your device.
Because the mobile phone firmware update requires the user’s full
attention for the duration of the update process, please make sure
you check all instructions and notes that appear at each step before
proceeding. Please note that removing the USB cable during the upgrade
may seriously damage your mobile phone.
• LG reserves the right to make firmware updates available only for
selected models at its own discretion and does not guarantee the
availability of the newer version of the firmware for all handset models.
Appendix
119
LG Mobile Phone software update via Overthe-Air (OTA)
This feature allows you to conveniently update your phone’s software to
a newer version via OTA, without connecting a USB cable. This feature will
only be available if and when LG makes a newer firmware version available
for your device.
Settings
To perform the phone software update, press
General About phone Common Update center Software
Update Check now for update.
• Your personal data from internal phone storage—including information
about your Google account and any other accounts, your system/
application data and settings, any downloaded applications and your
DRM licence—might be lost in the process of updating your phone’s
software. Therefore, LG recommends that you backup your personal
data before updating your phone’s software. LG does not take
responsibility for any loss of personal data.
• This feature depends on the area or service provider.
Appendix
120
FAQ
This chapter lists some problems you might encounter when using your
phone. Some problems require you to call your service provider, but most
are easy to fix yourself.
Message
Possible causes
Possible corrective measures
SIM card error
There is no SIM card in
the phone or it is inserted
incorrectly.
Make sure the SIM card is
correctly inserted.
No network
connection/
Dropped
network
Move toward a window or
Signal is weak or you are
into an open area. Check the
outside the carrier network.
network operator coverage map.
No
applications
can be set
Not supported by service
provider or registration
required.
Contact your service provider.
Downloaded
application
causes a lot of
errors.
Remove the application.
1. Press
Settings.
2. Tap General Apps.
3. Tap the app Uninstall.
Dialling error
New network not authorised.
New SIM card inserted.
Check for new restrictions.
Battery is not charged.
Charge battery. Check the
charging indicator on the display.
Calls not
available
Device cannot
be turned on
Appendix
121
Message
Possible causes
Possible corrective measures
Battery is not charged.
Charge battery.
Outside temperature is too
hot or cold.
Make sure device is charging at a
normal temperature.
Contact problem
Check the charger and its
connection to the device.
No voltage
Plug the charger into a different
outlet.
Charger defective
Replace the charger.
Wrong charger
Use only original LG accessories.
Number not
allowed.
The Fixed dialling number
function is on.
Check the Settings menu and
turn the function off.
Files do not
open
Unsupported file format
Check the supported file
formats.
The screen
does not turn
on when I
receive a call.
Proximity sensor problem
If you use a protection tape
or case, make sure it has not
covered the area around the
proximity sensor. Make sure that
the area around the proximity
sensor is clean.
No sound
Vibration mode
Check the settings status in
the sound menu to make sure
you are not in vibration or no
interruptions mode.
Charging error
Appendix
122
Message
Possible causes
Possible corrective measures
Restarting the device
If your device freezes or hangs,
you may need to close apps or
turn off the device and turn it
on again.
Performing a soft reset
A soft reset may be used to
reset the device if the screen
freezes, or the buttons, touch
screen, or device are no longer
responding. To perform a soft
reset of your device, simply press
& hold the Volume Down and
Power keys until the device
restart.
Hangs up or
freezes
Appendix
Intermittent software/
hardware problem
Resetting the device
If the methods above do not
solve your problem, perform a
factory data reset.
1. On the settings screen, tap
General Backup & reset
Factory data reset.
• Reset all settings for the
device and delete data.
Before performing the
factory data reset, remember
to make backup copies of all
important data stored in the
device.
• If you registered a Google
account to the device, you
must sign in to the same
Google account after
resetting the device.
123
Anti-Theft Guide
Set up your device to prevent other people from using it if it's been reset
to factory settings without your permission. For example, if your device is
lost, stolen, or wiped, only someone with your Google account or screen
lock information can use the device.
All you need to make sure your device is protected is:
• Set a screen lock: If your device is lost or stolen but you have a screen
lock set, the device can't be erased using the Settings menu unless
your screen is unlocked.
• Add your Google account on your device: If your device is wiped but
you have your Google account on it, the device can't finish the setup
process until your Google account information is entered again.
After your device is protected, you'll need to either unlock your screen or
enter your Google account password if you need to do a factory reset.
This ensures that you or someone you trust is doing the reset.
• Do not forget your Google account and password you had added to
your device prior to performing a factory reset. If you can't provide the
account information during the setup process, you won't be able to use
the device at all after performing the factory reset.
Appendix
124
More information
Open Source Software Notice Information
To obtain the source code under GPL, LGPL, MPL, and other open
source licenses, that is contained in this product, please visit
http://opensource.lge.com.
In addition to the source code, all referred license terms, warranty
disclaimers and copyright notices are available for download.
LG Electronics will also provide open source code to you on CD-ROM
for a charge covering the cost of performing such distribution (such
as the cost of media, shipping, and handling) upon email request to
opensource@lge.com. This offer is valid for three (3) years from the date
on which you purchased the product.
Regulatory information (Regulation ID
number, E-labeling, etc.)
For regulatory details, go to Settings General Regulatory & Safety.
Trademarks
• Copyright ©2017 LG Electronics, Inc. All rights reserved. LG and the LG
logo are registered trademarks of LG Group and its related entities.
• Google™, Google Maps™, Gmail™, YouTube™, Duo™ and Google Play™
store are trademarks of Google, Inc.
• Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. worldwide.
• Wi-Fi® and the Wi-Fi logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi
Alliance.
• All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their
respective owners.
Appendix
125
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Hereby, LG Electronics declares that this LG-M710ds product is in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions
of Directive 2014/53/EU.
A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at
http://www.lg.com/global/declaration
Appendix
126
Disposal of your old appliance
1. All electrical and electronic products should be disposed of
separately from the municipal waste stream via designated
collection facilities appointed by the government or the local
authorities.
2. The correct disposal of your old appliance will help prevent potential
negative consequences for the environment and human health.
3. For more detailed information about disposal of your old appliance,
please contact your city office, waste disposal service or the shop
where you purchased the product.
Disposal of waste batteries/accumulators
1. This symbol may be combined with chemical symbols for mercury
(Hg), cadmium (Cd) or lead (Pb) if the battery contains more than
0.0005% of mercury, 0.002% of cadmium or 0.004% of lead.
2. All batteries/accumulators should be disposed separately from the
municipal waste stream via designated collection facilities appointed
by the government or the local authorities.
3. The correct disposal of your old batteries/accumulators will help
to prevent potential negative consequences for the environment,
animal and human health.
4. For more detailed information about disposal of your old batteries/
accumulators, please contact your city office, waste disposal service
or the shop where you purchased the product.
Appendix
127
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising